Manual Web LCT Mn00327e 002 Ags 20 1 1 PDF

WEB LCT
AGS-20
Software application for the management
of AGS-20 equipment
Release 1.1
User manual
MN.00327.E - 002
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT AGS-20
Contents
MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 11
WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 12
FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 13
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 14
CHARACTERS SET .............................................................................................................. 15
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 16
WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 17

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 18
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser ............................................................................ 18
Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 19
Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 19
ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 20

Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 21
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 22
Users area ................................................................................................................... 24
User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 24
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 24
[Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 25
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) ............................................ 25
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 25
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 26
Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 27
Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 27
Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 27
Add equipment to the list......................................................................................... 28
Remove equipment from the list ............................................................................... 28
Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 29
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) .................................... 29
Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 30
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 31
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 32
Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 33
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 33
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 34
WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 1

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 35
MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 36
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 37
Verify the basic configuration of the equipment........................................................... 37
Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 37
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment .......................................... 37
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 37
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 38
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................... 38
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................... 38
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 39
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 40
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 40
Equipment Features tab ..................................................................................... 41
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 44
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 45
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure.......... 45
Activate one or more PM measures ........................................................................... 46
Deactivate one or more PM measures ........................................................................ 46
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures............................... 46
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures............... 46
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure...................... 47
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 49
Performances window........................................................................................ 50
PM measures available ............................................................................................ 54
G828 > ODU <radio branch> ............................................................................. 54
RxPwr > ODU <radio branch> ............................................................................ 54
TxPwr > ODU <radio branch> ............................................................................ 54
ACM > <Radio Link name> ................................................................................ 55
PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 56
Report & Logger ........................................................................................................... 58
Save the log of the equipment alarms ....................................................................... 58
Delete the log of the equipment alarms ..................................................................... 59
Save the log of the operations executed by the users .................................................. 59
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................ 59
Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................. 60
Report & Logger contextual area............................................................................... 61
NMS Wake Up Config. ................................................................................................... 62
Verify the Wake Up functionality status...................................................................... 62
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ............................ 62
Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................. 63
NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area ....................................................................... 64
Wake Up functionality (info) ..................................................................................... 65
Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................. 66
Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment ................................................ 66
Update the software/firmware of the equipment ......................................................... 66
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller........................ 67
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................. 68
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 68
Software Info & Maint contextual area ....................................................................... 69
Equipment Firmware tab .................................................................................... 69
Advanced tab ................................................................................................... 70
2 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Equipment software/firmware (info) .......................................................................... 71
Factory Default of the equipment (info) ..................................................................... 72
Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................. 73
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ................................... 73
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)................ 74
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (revert configuration) .................................................. 74
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area..................................................................... 76
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info) .................................................. 77
Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................. 78
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ............................. 78
Enable/disable an alarm .......................................................................................... 78
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................. 78
Change the severity of an alarm ............................................................................... 79
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area ...................................................................... 80
Alarms management (info) ...................................................................................... 81
Group/User Management ............................................................................................... 82
Groups .................................................................................................................. 83
Verify the user groups ....................................................................................... 83
Add a user group .............................................................................................. 83
Modify a user group .......................................................................................... 84
Delete a user group........................................................................................... 85
Groups contextual area...................................................................................... 86
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) ................................................................................ 88
SNMP protocol (info) ......................................................................................... 91
FTP/SFTP protocol (info) .................................................................................... 93
Installation and configuration of SSH server ................................................... 95
SSH protocol (info) ........................................................................................... 97
Users .................................................................................................................... 98
Verify the user list............................................................................................. 98
Add a user ....................................................................................................... 98
Modify a user ................................................................................................... 99
Delete a user ..................................................................................................100
Users contextual area.......................................................................................101
Users management (info) .................................................................................102
Permanent Login ...................................................................................................104
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ............................................................104
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login .....................................................104
Permanent Login contextual area .......................................................................105
Logged Users ........................................................................................................106
Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................106
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................106
Logged Users contextual area ............................................................................107
Security Management ..................................................................................................108
Services Status Config............................................................................................109
Verify the operating of the communication protocols .............................................109
Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol .....................................109
Services Status Config contextual area ...............................................................110
SSL/HTTP Secure...................................................................................................111
Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol .........................................................111
Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment......................................111
Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment....................................112
Download the SSL certificate in an equipment......................................................112

SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area ......................................................................113
Clients .................................................................................................................114
Ftp/Sftp..........................................................................................................115
Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols ................................115
Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol..................................................115
Modify the FTP access credentials.................................................................115
Modify the SFTP access credentials ...............................................................116
Ftp/Sftp contextual area .............................................................................117
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................118
Radio Configurator.......................................................................................................119
Verify the Radio Link configuration ...........................................................................119
Create a Radio Link................................................................................................119
Modify a Radio Link ................................................................................................120
Delete a Radio Link ................................................................................................120
Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link..........................................................................121
Radio Configurator contextual area ..........................................................................122
Radio Link (info) ....................................................................................................123
BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................125
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation .....................................................................................125
Modify the reference band.......................................................................................125
Modify the reference modulation ..............................................................................126
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation...............................................127
Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation ..........................................127
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....127
Verify/modify the number of E1s permanently allocated .............................................127
Verify/modify the Link identification number..............................................................128
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................129
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................129
Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................130
General Preset ............................................................................................................131
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................131
Verify/modify the radio Link label.............................................................................131
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................132
Xpic ...........................................................................................................................133
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function .............................................133
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU ...............................................133
Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU ..............................................................133
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .............................................134
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ........................................................134
Xpic contextual area...............................................................................................135
XPIC function (info) ...............................................................................................136
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................137

Ethernet.....................................................................................................................138
Bridge Mode Conf. .................................................................................................139
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .....................................................139
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ....................................................139
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area .....................................................................140
Port Manager ........................................................................................................141
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration................................................................141
Modify the type of interface ...............................................................................141
Modify the enabling status of a port....................................................................142

Activate the loop on line side of a port ................................................................142
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ............................................................142
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port...................................142
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port .................................................143
Modify the transmission speed of a port ..............................................................143
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port....................................143
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports .........................143
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ................................................................144
Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports .................................144
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .....................................144
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depend-
ing on its priority (User Priority).........................................................................145
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ...........................................145
Port Manager contextual area ............................................................................146
Physical Interface tab .................................................................................146
Optical tab ................................................................................................148
Data Flow tab ............................................................................................149
Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab..................................................................150
Tunneling tab ............................................................................................150
VLAN ...................................................................................................................152
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management ........................................152
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table ...............................152
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table .............................153
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch ............153
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ..........................................153
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ..........154
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ..........................................154
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority
802.1p received on the port ..............................................................................154
Verify the existing static VLANs..........................................................................154
Create one or more static VLANs........................................................................155
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ............................................................155
Delete one or more static VLANs ........................................................................156
VLAN contextual area .......................................................................................157
Basic Settings tab ......................................................................................157
Port Settings tab ........................................................................................158
Static VLANs tab ........................................................................................159
Prov. Bridge-VLAN .................................................................................................160
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ........................................160
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) ......................160
Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area .....................................................................161
C-VID Registration tab ................................................................................161
PEP Configuration tab .................................................................................162
Prov. Bridge-EtherType...........................................................................................163
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ........................163
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .......................163
Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area ..............................................................164
Header Compression ..............................................................................................165
Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet
packets ..........................................................................................................165
Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet
packets ..........................................................................................................165
Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets ..165
Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets .........166

Header Compression contextual area ..................................................................167
Header Compression (info)................................................................................168
RSTP....................................................................................................................169
Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment .............................169
Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function ..........................170
Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function ...........................................170
Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function ..................................................171
Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP)......................171
Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP)............................................171
Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP).................................172
Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP)....172
Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) ......172
Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) ....................................................173
Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port ...................................173
Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) ...................................................173
Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP) .....................174
RSTP contextual area .......................................................................................175
Settings tab ..............................................................................................175
Port Settings tab ........................................................................................177
Port Status tab ..........................................................................................178
STP/RSTP Protocol (info)...................................................................................180
LLF ......................................................................................................................181
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ..............................181
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality ......................................181
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality...................182
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ........182
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ....182
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ......................................................183
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio ........................................183
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality .............................................183
Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm ......................................................184
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ...........................184
LLF contextual area ..........................................................................................185
Bidirectional LLF (info)......................................................................................187
Queue Depth.........................................................................................................188
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............188
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output .............188
Queue Depth contextual area ............................................................................189
Statistics ..............................................................................................................191
Interface ........................................................................................................192
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) ......................192
Reset the counters results (Interfaces group) ................................................192
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group).....192
Reset the counters results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ..............................193
Interface contextual area ............................................................................194
Interface tab ......................................................................................194
Ethernet tab .......................................................................................194
DCN (LAN 3) ...............................................................................................................197
MNGT Port Configuration ........................................................................................198
Verify the configuration of the management port..................................................198
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port .......................................198
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway ...................................................198
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision ...........................................199

Modify the enabling status of management port ...................................................199
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port.............199
Modify the transmission speed of the management port ........................................200
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port ...........................200
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port ..........................200
MNGT Port Configuration contextual area ............................................................202
Routing Table........................................................................................................204
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ...........................................................204
Add an element to the Routing Table ..................................................................204
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table .........................................205
Routing Table contextual area ...........................................................................206
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................207
E1 .......................................................................................................................208
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ......................................................208
Modify the label of an E1...................................................................................208
Activate/deactivate the E1 use...........................................................................208
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ........................................................................209
Modify the management status of LOS alarm .......................................................209
E1 contextual area ...........................................................................................210
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................211
Display the connections of the equipment .................................................................211
Execute a Tributary-Radio connection .......................................................................211
Execute a Radio-Radio connection ............................................................................212
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..................................................................212
Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) ........................................................213
Delete one or more connections...............................................................................213
Cross Connection contextual area ............................................................................214
Cross connection matrix (info).................................................................................215
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................217
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .................................................217
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................218
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................218
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................218
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................218
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism ...............219
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation ...........................................................219
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................219
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................220
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................220
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................220
Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................221
Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH ..........................................221
Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B .............................221
Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1........................................222
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................222
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the
expiry of Wait Time......................................................................................................222
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages ............................................................223
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LANs..................................................223
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism
sources ......................................................................................................................223
Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ...............224
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................225

General tab...........................................................................................................225
T0 tab ..................................................................................................................226
LAN SSM tab .........................................................................................................228
1000Base-T Role tab ..............................................................................................230
Sa Bit tab .............................................................................................................231
E1 Retiming tab.....................................................................................................231
Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................232
Management of synchronisation...............................................................................232
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................232
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................232
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................233
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................233
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................235
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................235
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................236
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....236
RADIO .............................................................................................................................238
Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................239
Verify/modify the duplex frequency ..........................................................................239
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on .....................239
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .............................................240
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) .........................................240
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ........................................................240
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter...............................241
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation..........................................................241
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device ..........................................................241
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM pro-
file.......................................................................................................................242
Radio Branch contextual area ..................................................................................243
ODU Settings tab .............................................................................................243
ODU Powers tab ..............................................................................................244
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................245
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................246
Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................246
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................246
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................247
PRBS .........................................................................................................................248
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure ......................248
Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................248
Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................248
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure................................................248
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .....................................................249
PRBS contextual area .............................................................................................250
Radio Loop & Cmd .......................................................................................................251
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................251
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................251
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................252
Execute the test (RF Loop)......................................................................................252
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply....................................................253
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter ...........................................................253
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .................................................253
Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area ...........................................................................255

Test RF Loop (info) ................................................................................................257
Manual Operations.......................................................................................................258
Verify the manual operations status .........................................................................258
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..............................................................................258
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .........................................................259
Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply ..................................................259
Activate/deactivate a radio loop ...............................................................................260
Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function............................................................260
Force the management of the switching in reception...................................................260
Force the management of the switching in transmission ..............................................261
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ................................................................261
Force the use of a synchronism source .....................................................................262
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..............................................................................262
Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................263
Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................263
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure .............................................263
Manual Operations contextual area ..........................................................................264
PSU Alarm Config. .......................................................................................................267
Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm ....................................................................267
Enable/disable the PSU alarm ..................................................................................267
PSU Alarm Config. contextual area ...........................................................................268
Radio Switch ...............................................................................................................269
<Radio Link name> ..............................................................................................270
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches .................270
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) ................270
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) ...........271
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ........271
Modify the Wait Time parameter ........................................................................271
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .......................................................................................................272
<Radio Link name> contextual area ...................................................................273
Radio switch (info) ...........................................................................................274
RMON ........................................................................................................................275
Settings ...............................................................................................................276
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics.......................................................276
Activate the count of the RMon statistics .............................................................276
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics .........................................................277
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ............................277
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics .......................277
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon
statistics .........................................................................................................278
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon
statistics .........................................................................................................279
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics ........279
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics...280
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the
RMON statistics ...............................................................................................280
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the
RMON statistics ...............................................................................................282
Settings contextual area ...................................................................................283
Ethernet Statistics tab ................................................................................283
Ethernet History tab ...................................................................................284
Ethernet Service Statistics tab .....................................................................285
Ethernet Service History tab ........................................................................286

RMon standard (info)........................................................................................287
Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................................289
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ............289
Ethernet Statistics contextual area .....................................................................290
Ethernet Service Statistics ......................................................................................292
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port
& VLAN) .........................................................................................................292
Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area ..........................................................293
Ethernet History ....................................................................................................295
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).........................295
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .................................295
Ethernet History contextual area ........................................................................296
Ethernet Service History .........................................................................................298
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and
Port & VLAN) ...................................................................................................298
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ..298
Ethernet Service History contextual area.............................................................299
ALARM IN/OUT..................................................................................................................301
Alarm Input ................................................................................................................302
Verify the User Input status and configuration ...........................................................302
Modify the name of an User Input ............................................................................302
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................302
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input ............................303
Alarm Input contextual area ....................................................................................304
User Input (info)....................................................................................................305
Alarm Output ..............................................................................................................306
Verify the User Output status and configuration .........................................................306
Modify the name of an User Output ..........................................................................306
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output ............................306
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output..................................................307
Force the User Output activation..............................................................................307
Remove the forcing of the User Output .....................................................................307
Alarm Output contextual area..................................................................................308
User Output (info) .................................................................................................309
ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 310
OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 315
PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 325
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 331

MANUAL CONTENT
This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the WEB Local Craft Terminal application
(release 1.1) present in the equipment AGS-20.
The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Ter-
minal page and selecting Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter.
In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for AGS-20.
WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for AGS-20.

WEB LCT APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC (see Installation).
At start-up of WEB LCT, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page that is the
application graphical interface (GUI).
The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser (see Open/close the WEB LCT page - Fig.1).
Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene
to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and com-
mands (Equipment Menu).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33) NE management Browser
(HTTP/
Controller Supervision WEB LCT page
HTTPS)
port
equipment
WEB LCT (172.18.60.33) Help file
application Internet
SFTP/SSH
SSH Server Help Web Server
FTP *
FTP Server Web Lct Console
* See Installation

FUNCTIONALITIES
Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:
The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).
The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).
The log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equip-
ment configuration (Report & Logger).
The Wake Up trap (NMS Wake Up Config.).
The equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software
Info & Maint.).
The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).
The forward status of the alarms and their severity (Alarm Severity Config.).
The equipment users list (Group/User Management).
The equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, FTP, SSH, SFTP, HTTPS) (Secu-
rity Management).
The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive mod-
ulation, etc.) (Equipment).
The Ethernet Switch main configuration, the TDM tributaries and cross connection matrix (TDM)
(Base Band).
The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).
The radio parameters (Radio).
The maintenance parameters (S/N, PRBS, Radio loops, RMon and Radio switch) (Maintenance).
The User Input (local and remote) and the User Output (Alarm In/Out).
The remote element list (Remote elements list area)
The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).

LIMITS
The following limits must be considered for every single piece of equipment.
Remote equipment list

Maximum number of equipment in the list: 100
Maximum number of stations in the list: 30
Remote equipment list (info)
User list
Maximum number of groups in the list: 10
Maximum number of users in the list: 10
Users management (info)
WEB LCT Session

Maximum number of equipment which can be connected at the same time by means of a single
WEB LCT session: 1
Login to equipment
Maximum number of contemporary connections (login): 10
The system supports at most 10 groups, 10 users and 10 login at the same time.
As regards the logged users, these are distributed in the following mode:
CLI users* connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10.
SNMP users** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10.
WEB users*** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 4.
* CLI user. User of SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System) application.

** SNMP user. User of NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
*** WEB user. User of WEB LCT application.
Area Events
Maximum number of signals in the area Events: 500

CHARACTERS SET
The GUI accepts and recognizes the character set defined by the ISO/IEC 8859-1.
Only exception are the fields relevant to the management of user/groups, which accept and recognize only
the characters 09, az and AZ.

INSTALLATION
WEB LCT
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.
It does not require any installation on the user PC.
At the first equipment switch-on, the user can immediately connect to it via WEB LCT because
the application is already present in the controller.
Then you can Update the software/firmware of the equipment.
Add-ins
As help to equipment WEB LCT for the management of:
FTP protocol, it is necessary to install the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server
(see Equipment.
Help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server), it is necessary to install the program
WEB Lct Console.
SFTP protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on ones PC (see Installation and
configuration of SSH server).
The instructions for the installation of the Web Lct Console (WLC) are reported in the relevant
manuals. WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows environment.
WARNING AGS-20 equipment is managed from version 1.2.0 of WLC or later.
Help online
WEB LCT is equipped with a help on-line which can be opened selecting the option [Help] or
in WEB LCT page.
The help on-line must be installed on ones PC using the installation file specific for the WEB LCT
of the equipment you wish to use.

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE
Open/close the WEB LCT page

Elements of the WEB LCT page
Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser

Open more WEB LCT pages
Close the WEB LCT page
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser
WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more net-
work cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web
Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username/pass-
word) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller. The user must be asso-
ciated to a group for which the protocol HTTP and/or HTTPS is active (see Users management
(info).
For the first connection or after a Factory Default operation (see Advanced tab) use the creden-
tials Username: admin, Password: admin.
The opening of the WEB LCT page is supported with:

Internet Explorer 9 or later.
Firefox 4.0 or later.
As help for the WEB LCT application in order to manage:

The FTP Server and Help Web Server, run the program WEB Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later.
Alternatively, for the management of FTP, it is possible to use a FTP Server already present on
PC (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
The protocol SFTP, it is necessary to install and configure a SSH server (see Installation and con-
figuration of SSH server).
1. Run a browser.
2. In the address box type the IP Address of the equipment.

WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Services Status Config), an error
page could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because trou-
bles have been detected with the security certificates.
For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation.
To download the SSL certificate see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment.
Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept how-
ever the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
3. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.
4. Type the password, in the Password box.
5. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
6. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.2).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.

Open more WEB LCT pages
It is possible to open:
More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or dif-
ferent users.
Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.
Close the WEB LCT page
Select the [Logout] parameter.

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE
1 - Equipment Menu area

2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area
Fig.2 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an AGS-20 equipment.
Fig.2 Elements of the WEB LCT page (AGS-20)
3
1 2
5 4

Equipment Menu area
This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.2).
Commands
The commands are subdivided in groups:
Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports,
Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parame-
ters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each
selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
It is possible:
Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing
Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing .
The symbol identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press to hide the area. Press to display the area again.

Equipment info area
This area shows the equipment general properties.
Parameters
Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch:
Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch
operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.
Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.
Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and
at least one C-VLAN component.
Tables
LEFT TABLE (see Fig.2). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.
Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data, present in the relevant row, refer to:
Tx <radio branch>. Operating status and parameters of the specific branch
relevant to transmission (ODU A/ODU B).
Rx <radio branch>. Operating status and parameters of the specific branch
relevant to reception (ODU A/ODU B).
RF frequency. The wording:
ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem.
Must be Set (Dplx). The specific frequency is not set.
Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx...) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx...).
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (lines Tx...) indicates that the transmitter is off because of an action
of the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of Off or Per-
manent Off option) or because of the activation of one or more alarms which cause the
switch-off of the transmitter (for example, RADIO Vco Fail Alarm).
RIGHT TABLE. Channel/modulation and radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet and
TDM:
Bandwidth & Modulation. Current channel and modulation.
TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1).
ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to Ethernet tributaries.
The parameters are subdivided by radio branch:

Tx <Radio Link name> [1+0] and Rx <Radio Link name> [1+0]. Respectively
transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in not protected configuration.
Tx <Radio Link name> [1+1 HS] and Rx <Radio Link name> [1+1 HS]. Respec-
tively transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in protected configura-
tion of isofrequential type.
Tx <Radio Link name> [1+1 FD] and Rx <Radio Link name> [1+1 FD]. Respec-
tively transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in protected configura-
tion of heterofrequential type.
Tx <Radio Link name> [2+0 XPIC] <radio branch> and Rx <Radio Link name>
[2+0 XPIC] <radio branch>. Respectively transmission and reception radio branches
of a Link with two radio directions in XPIC configuration.
The presence of two different Radio Links in 1+0 configuration indicates that the equipment is
in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W.
If the Radio module is not equipped or a Radio Link has not been defined yet, the parameters
present in the table are not meaningful. The area displays the wording Data Unavailable.

Update data
The information present in the Equipment Info area is updated every 15 seconds (timeout).
Press to force the Equipment Info area updating.
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.

Users area
User Profile parameter

[Logout] parameter
[Open Far End] parameter
[Help] parameter
User Profile parameter
Profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page.
Options
Admin. The user has Administrator profile.
The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the
equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user has Read/Write profile.

The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations avail-
able only to the Admin. user.
Maint. The user has Maintenance profile.

The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations
(MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.
Read Only. The user has Read Only profile.

The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
Login/Logout
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/
profile entered during the login request.
In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or
a different user with respect to that used for the login.
NMS
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervi-
sory system considers the connection of a WEB user with Read Only or Maintenance profile a
WEB LCT connection in Monitoring mode.
While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a WEB user with
Read/Write or Administrator profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.
[Logout] parameter
This parameter executes the logout of the current user.

When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed.
To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.

[Open Far End] parameter
This parameter opens the WEB LCT page of remote equipment to contained in the Remote Element Table.
Operations
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.
1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter.

If the remote equipment list contains:
Only one item of equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equip-
ment is displayed.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to
activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment
is displayed.
If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote
equipment is unreachable.
No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the re-
mote equipment.
More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, con-
taining the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
Station. Station name.
IP Address. IP address.
OSI. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to
activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment
is displayed.
[Help] parameter
This parameter opens the help online of application.
The message Unable to contact help support... indicates that the program WEB Lct Console necessary for
the management of the Help Web Server has not been started (see Installation).

Remote elements list area
In this area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Parameters
Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list.
STATION ( )
Equipment is subdivided into stations.
Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if com-
pressed it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the
list.
EQUIPMENT ( or )
The symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see column Type). The
symbol represents other types of the equipment.
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the cre-
ation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP ad-
dress.
IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment:

Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT application.
Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT application, constituting the equip-
ment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equip-
ment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT application.
Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node.
With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus,
where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.
2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.
2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.
OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.

Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Push-button
GENERAL
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the list.
Clear. Reset the remote equipment list
Open. Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
STATION
Add. Add a station to the list
Remove. Remove a station of the list
Rename. Rename a station of the list

ELEMENT
Add. Add equipment to the list
Remove. Remove equipment from the list
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
See also
Add a station to the list
User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.
WARNING It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.
1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group).
2. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
3. Press OK.
The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list rele-
vant to the already existing stations.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
Rename a station of the list
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed.
2. Press Rename.
3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 char-
acters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
4. Press OK.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area.
Remove a station of the list
WARNING The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all pieces of equipment coupled with such
a station.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Station group).

The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
Add equipment to the list
WARNING It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.

Equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
2. Press Add (Element group).
3. Into the IP Address box, type the IP address of the equipment.

The program does not create two pieces of equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even
if in different stations).
4. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:
Managed By SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT application.
Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT application that constitutes the equipment
placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment.
Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by WEB LCT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling be-
tween the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted into an OSI net-
work.
2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the re-
mote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.
2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the re-
mote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.
5. Press OK.
In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive
number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.
Remove equipment from the list
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Equipment group).

The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.

Reset the remote equipment list
1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear.

The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list
area.
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
1. In the Remote elements list area select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT
page.
2. Press Open.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to activate
the connection and press Login.
In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the pro-
gram WEB LCT is available.
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such equipment, the WEB LCT program reads its remote equipment list and automat-
ically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the WEB LCT window, all the stations
that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.
The user disables the equipment.
The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More information concerning the WEB LCT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

Contextual area
This area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.
Push-button
Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this pe-
riod is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
The confirmation window displays the option Dont ask again. Activate the option to avoid the
system displays the confirmation request when Apply is selected in any context of WEB LCT
page. This setting remains valid until the exit from the current session (logout or page closing).
If the Apply push-button is not available:
It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or
the equipment is in connected/monitor status.
No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the op-
eration or the change of the parameters.
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context
which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.
Tabs
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.
Parameters
The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:
Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.
If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because,
for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value
has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).
Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.
When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box.
It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communi-
cated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).

Equipment status area
This area shows the functional status of the equipment.
Parameters
URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:
Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.
NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:
Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.
DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment software/firmware. Colour box:

Light blue. The update is in progress.
Grey. The update is not in progress.
MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:

Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
Grey. No manual forcing is active.
Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.

Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:
Colour box. Signal type and alarm gravity:
Green/Status. Status signal.
Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.
Date/time of the signal detection.
If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be
pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The for-
mat of date/time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.
Operations
Verify the active manual operations
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
Update data
The information present in the Events area are dynamically updated when an alarm is generated
or cleared.
Press to force the Events area updating and remove the detected and cleared alarms (box
White/Cleared).
Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.

See also
Alarms management (info)
Verify the active manual operations
1. Select the MAN. OP box.

A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press to update the information.
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.
WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.
1. Select the MAN. OP box.

The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.
Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for in-
stance a loop) affects the traffic.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.
3. Press Change and confirm.

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE
Opening page
Login Failed! Invalid User o Password!. It means that the typed username and/or password is
wrong and/or not present in the equipment user list.
The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It
means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and
the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the WEB user, to be able to execute the login
of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the WEB user
for the execution of the operation.
Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum num-
ber of allowed users (see Limits).
Open page
When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an opera-
tion or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
Warning. Invalid or time-out session. You will be redirected to login form The equipment is in
disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters cannot be verified/modified.
Press Ok to display the WEB LCT page of login to the equipment. Fill the fields Username and
Password and press Login to reconnect to the equipment.
Access Denied. The selected context is available only to the user with profile Administrator.
Warning: You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish
to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are
automatically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this
means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
Loading The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Updating, Applying Changes The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equip-
ment.
Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)
Main. It manages the general equipment parameters.

Equipment. It manages the radio equipment configuration.
Base Band. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration, and the DCN parameters and the TDM
traffic.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Radio. It manages the Radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the maintenance parameters (S/N, PRBS, Radio loops, RMon).
Alarm In/Out. It manages the User Input (local and remote) and the User Output.
The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter)
necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.

MAIN
Equipment Properties. It manages the basic configuration of equipment.

Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Report & Logger. It manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by
the users and the equipment configuration.
NMS Wake Up Config. It manages the Wake Up trap.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default
equipment settings.
Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration.
Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity.
Group/User Management. It manages the users list of the equipment.
Security Management. It manages the equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, FTP,
SSH, SFTP, HTTPS).

Equipment Properties
The Equipment Properties command manages the basic configuration of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the basic configuration of the equipment
Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
Execute the equipment software reset
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
Verify the equipment feature
Enable a new equipment feature
Verify the equipment units
GUI
Equipment Properties contextual area
Verify the basic configuration of the equipment
1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

The General Info tab displays the basic configuration of the equipment.
2. In the Equipment ID field set an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 50 characters.
2. In the Agent IP Address box type the new IP address.
WARNING Operation is no traffic affecting.

After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

2. Press System Restart and confirm.
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
User Profile | Admin.
WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.
2. Press Align to PC time and confirm.

The values present in the System Date/Time area are updated by the values of ones PC.
Verify the equipment feature

2. Select the Equipment Features tab.
The tab displays the equipment feature enabled on demand.
Enable a new equipment feature
WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:
Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them.
If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same
configured for the FTP Server and the file (certificate) must be present into a sub-folder of the
Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on ones PC (see SSH protocol (info).
The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For
a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user
(or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and
In order to enable one or more features, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate, represented
by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more feature, a specific enabling certificate is required, be-
cause there is an univocal Link between each certificate and each specific equipment.
2. Select the Equipment Features tab.
3. Press Upgrade.
4. In the Cert. file path, type the path/name of the certificate.

If the equipment uses the:
FTP protocol and the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full
path (c:\..). Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only
the sub-folder and the filename of the Shared Folder).
SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configuration of the SSH server (see
Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).

5. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server o r the SSH Server (if not otherwise
set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to the IP address of the PC).
6. Press Send.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.
Invalid operation for this equipment. The selected certificate and equipment are not compati-
ble (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).
Verify the equipment units
2. Select the Equipment Units tab.

The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

Equipment Properties contextual area
The contextual area displays the basic configuration of the equipment.
Tabs
General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, IP address, software/firmware version, date/
time.
Equipment Features tab. Functionalities enabled for the equipment.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
See also
Equipment Properties (command)
General Info tab
The tab displays the general equipment properties.
Parameters
Ethernet Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch:
Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch
operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.
Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.
Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and
at least one C-VLAN component.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
IP Address. IP Address of the equipment.
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
Firmware Version. Identification code and version of the equipment software/firmware pre-
sent on the memory bench in use.
WEB LCT Version. Version of the WEB LCT application for AGS-20 present into the equipment.
WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT application for AGS-20 present
into the equipment.
System Up Time. Days, hours, minutes and seconds since the last restart of the equipment.
SYSTEM DATE/TIME
Date. Reference date of the equipment.
Time. Reference time of the equipment.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Push-button
System Restart. Execute the equipment software reset

Align to PC time. Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of
the PC
See also
Equipment Features tab
The tab displays the list of the equipment feature enabled on demand.
Parameters
FEATURE NAME
Upgrade up to 50 Mbps. Radio profile up to 50 Mb/s*.

Radio Aggregation. Enabling radio configuration IF Radio Sharing Scheme and ETH
Radio Sharing Scheme.
XPIC. XPIC functionality.
Built-in fade margin. Fade Margin functionality (calculation of the Link margin).
Eth transport. Enabling of Ethernet transport.
OSPF. OSPF protocol.
Security package. Equipment security protocols management.
Eth OAM enhanced. OAM-FM functionality for Ethernet network.
Enhanced Eth monitoring. Monitoring of Enhanced Ethernet.
Sync Quality management. Synchronisation quality management.
Packet processing (1). Optional Ethernet processing.
* The channelling/modulation available for each radio profile are shown in Tab.1.
FEATURE STATUS
Enabled. The functionality is enabled.

Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
Push-button
Upgrade. Enable a new equipment feature
Tab.1 Radio profile details (Equipment Features)
Channel spacing
Modulation
7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz 40 MHz 56 MHz
Radio profile: Upgrade up to 50 Mbps
4 QAM strong X X X X -
4 QAM X X X - -
16 QAM strong X X X - -
16 QAM X X - - -
32 QAM X X - - -
64 QAM X - - - -

Channel spacing
Modulation
128 QAM X - - - -
256 QAM X - - - -
512 QAM strong X - - - -
512 QAM X - - - -
1024 QAM X - - - -
2048 QAM - - - - -

4 QAM strong X X X X X
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X -
32 QAM X X X - -
64 QAM X X - - -
128 QAM X X - - -
256 QAM X X - - -
512 QAM strong X X - - -

512 QAM X X - - -
1024 QAM X - - - -
2048 QAM - - - - -
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X X
32 QAM X X X X X
64 QAM X X X X -
128 QAM X X X X -
256 QAM X X X - -
512 QAM strong X X X - -
512 QAM X X X - -
1024 QAM strong X X - - -
1024 QAM X X - - -
2048 QAM - X - - -
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X X

Channel spacing
Modulation
32 QAM X X X X X
64 QAM X X X X X
128 QAM X X X X X
256 QAM X X X X -
512 QAM X X X X -
1024 QAM X X X X -
2048 QAM - X X - -
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X X
32 QAM X X X X X
64 QAM X X X X X
128 QAM X X X X X
256 QAM X X X X X
512 QAM X X X X X
1024 QAM X X X X -
2048 QAM - X X X -
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X X
32 QAM X X X X X
64 QAM X X X X X
128 QAM X X X X X
256 QAM X X X X X
512 QAM X X X X X
1024 QAM X X X X X
2048 QAM - X X X X
X Available option.
- Not available option.

Equipment Units tab
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to an unit for which are indicated:
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indi-
cates that the unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is
not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group
represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In
this case the field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to
the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not con-
tained into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:
Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording -
Real Type parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type param-
eter).
Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.
HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen
one (Expected Type parameter).
SW Mism. The software/firmware version present into the controller of the pe-
ripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench
in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the software/firmware version
of the equipment).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the
Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
White. Alarm deactivated.

Performance Monitoring
WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one
Radio Link defined.
The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Operations
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure
GUI
Performance Monitoring contextual area
See also
PM measures available
PM measures (info)
1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Open new performance window.

The Performances [none selected] window displays the PM measures.
The measures are subdivided in groups.
The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following:
G828 > ODU <radio branch>, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
RxPwr > ODU <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr > ODU <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM > <Radio Link name>, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.
For every measure is pointed out the status:
(Stop.). The measure is not on progress.
(Run.). The measure is on progress.
Below the measure, more options are pointed out: seconds, blocks, Rlts, etc. depending on the type of
selected measure.
Every option indicates the measurement unit of the control parameters for which you wish to display
the results and the threshold exceeding alarms.
This subdivision is necessary because the results of the control parameters cannot be graphically dis-
played by means of different measurement units.
4. Select the wished measuring unit.

The Performances [group / measure / measurement unit] window displays the results of the control
parameters, in graphic and table format, and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms.
If the measurement has never been activated, the window will result empty.
The items in the Performances window are described in Fig.3.
It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance window
or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself.

3. To activate:
All measures in a group, select the group.
Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.
4. Press Start and confirm.

The not active measure(s) are started and their status passes from (Stop.) to (Run.).
3. To deactivate:
4. Press Stop and confirm.

The active measure(s) are stopped and their status passes from (Run.) to (Stop.).

3. To reset the threshold exceeding alarms of:

4. Press Clear Alarms and confirm.

For the selected measure, active alarms are deactivated except for the unavailability alarms.
3. To reset the values of the records daily and primary of:

4. Press Clear Counters and confirm.

The values displayed into table are reset.

3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.
4. Press Commons.
If G828 > ODU <radio branch> measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following pa-
rameters:
General area. Threshold levels of the UAS parameter:
N Ses Set UAS(P) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds with
SES) over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply
and confirm.
N Ses Reset UAS(Q) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds
without SES) over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply
and confirm.
The threshold (expressed as percentage of the errored blocks) over which it is declared a SES
is 30% and is not changeable.
Press to compress the area. Press to expand the area.
15M Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute peri-
od, when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm.
The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
24H Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and con-
firm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15M Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute pe-
riod, when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
24H Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
15M Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
24H Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour
period) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Sep.
If RxPwr > ODU <radio branch> measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following pa-
rameters:
15M Rlts Thresholds area. 15M Rlts alarms threshold:
Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (ex-
pressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is
lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system
activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold
and accordingly of the alarm.
24H Rlts Thresholds area. 24H Rlts alarms threshold:

Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (ex-
pressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower
than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system activates
the relevant alarms.
Rlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the received power:
Rlt 1 (dBm), Rlt 2 (dBm), Rlt 3 (dBm), Rlt 4 (dBm), Rlt 5 (dBm). Respectively the first,
the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -100dBm and -
20dBm.
Press to compress an area. Press to expand the area.
If TxPwr > ODU <radio branch> measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following pa-
rameters:
15M Tlts Thresholds area. 15M Tlts alarms threshold:
Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as num-
ber of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
24H Tlts Thresholds area. 24H Tlts alarms threshold:
Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as num-
ber of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
Tlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
Tlt 1 (dBm), Tlt 2 (dBm), Tlt 3 (dBm), Tlt 4 (dBm). Respectively the first, the second, the
third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -40dBm and 35dBm,
press Apply and confirm.
If ACM > <Radio Link name> measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following param-
eters:
15M Thresholds area. Alarms threshold:
15M <modulation> Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15
minute period, when the counter <modulation> has increased - over which it is activated
the alarm.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default 0), press
Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
24H Thresholds area. Alarms threshold:
24H <modulation> Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24
hour period, when the counter <modulation> has increased - over which it is activated
the alarm.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default 0),
press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
<modulation> = 4QAMS, 4QAM, 16QAMS, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 512QAMS,
512QAM, 1024QAMS or 1024QAM or 2048QAM (see Tab.5).

Radio Link defined.
The contextual area manage the PM measures.
Push-button
Open new performance window. Open the Performances window which allows:
Manage the PM measures (activation, deactivation, threshold setting).
Display the activation status of the PM measures
Display the results of the measures in graphic and table format.
Display the status of the threshold exceeding alarms.
It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance
window or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself.
See also
Performance Monitoring (command)
PM measures (info)

Performances window
Fig.3 displays the elements of the Performances window.
Fig.3 Performances window
3 4 6
(1) Title bar. When the window is opened, the title bar displays Performances [none selected].
When you select an option which allows displaying the results of a measure ( see note 3), Perfor-
mances [Selected group / Selected measure / Selected measurement unit] will be displayed, for
example Performances [G828 / ODU A / seconds].
Push-button
. Compress the window.
. Expand the window.
. Expand the window to the size of the Browser page.
. Restore the original size of the window.
. Close the window.
(2) Push-buttons bar:

Start. Activate one or more PM measures.
Stop. Deactivate one or more PM measures.
Clear Alarms. Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures.
Clear Counters. Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
stored into the equipment and displayed into the window.
Refresh. Update the data.
Commons. Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure. Push-
button meaningful only if one group is selected.
Open New Window. Open a new Performances window.

The push-buttons Start, Stop, Clear Alarms and Clear Counters, if a group is selected, execute
their action for all the measures present in the group. Otherwise, if one measure or one option below
the measure is selected, they execute their action only for the selected measure.
(3) List of the PM measures. The measures are subdivided in groups.

Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
Selecting one measure, the options pointing out the measurement units of the parameters associ-
ated to the measure are displayed. This subdivision is necessary because it is not possible to graph-
ically represent the results of the control parameters by means of different measurement units.
Selecting one measurement unit in the right part of the window (see note 4), the result of the con-
trol parameters and the threshold exceeding alarms are displayed. If the measure has never been
activated, the graph and the table will be empty.
The symbol:
identifies an expanded group or measure.
identifies a compressed group or measure.
identifies a measuring unit.
To every measure, the status is displayed:

(Stop.). The measure is not on progress.
(Run.). The measure is on progress.
The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following:
G828 > ODU <radio branch>, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units:
seconds. Seconds: ES, SES, SEP, UAS.
blocks. Blocks: BBE.
RxPwr > ODU <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at reception.
Rlts. Seconds: Rlts1, Rlts2, Rlts3, Rlts4, Rlts5.
TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.
TxPwr > ODU <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
Tlts. Seconds: Tlts1, Tlts2, Tlts3, Tlts4.
TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.
ACM > <Radio Link name>, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following counters:
seconds. Counters relevant to the ACM profiles.
UpDownShift. Counters Unavailable, DownShift and UpShift.
Press to hide the list of measures. Press to display the list again.
(4) Graphical representation of the measure results. This area displays, in graphical format, the
results of the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit.
Every bar represents the result of the measure of one parameter in a given observation period (daily
or primary record).
The position of the bar on the x-axis indicates the daily or primary record which it is referred to:
C.D. Current daily record (24 hours). The X100 suffix indicates that the value must be mul-
tiplied by 100 to obtain the real measured value.
L. D. Preceding daily record. The displayed value must be multiplied by 100 to obtain the
real measured value.
Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).
15 Min. 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
Moreover, for every record the relevant status is displayed: (ML), (MF), (IN), (LO), (RE). The de-
scription of every single status is reported in the following note. If the status indication is not pre-
sent, the record is not available, because the measure was not active during the considered
observation period.

The colour of the bar indicates the control parameter that corresponds to the value. The key of the
parameters and their colours is always pointed out above the graph. The displayed control param-
eters changes according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note 3).
The position on the y-axis indicates the value achieved by the parameter during the specific obser-
vation period (record). The measurement unit on the y-axis changes depending on the type of pa-
rameter represented in the graph. Moreover the y-scale dynamically changes depending on the
entity of the represented values.
The results relevant to a given parameter can be hidden selecting the parameter label located in
the top part of the area (for example ). To display the parameter results again, select the
label again.
(5) Table representation of the measure results. This area displays, in table format, the results of
the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit.
For every parameter, the result of the measure is pointed out relevant to a given observation period
(daily or primary record):
Type. According to the selected measure this field indicates:
G828, RxPwr and TxPwr measures: Control parameters (see PM measures availa-
ble).
ACM measure: Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile (see PM
measures available).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed
in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. Besides one counter per
modulation, the following counters are foreseen:
Unavailable. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, for
which the count has not been possible because the current ACM profile was
not connected to the radio.
DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the counters. Such
results have been subdivided according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note
3).
Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
Last Day. Preceding daily record.
Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).
15 Min. 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status
of the records (Count. Status):
Meaningless (ML) (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not
affected by errors.
Meaningful (MF) (green). The record has been completely acquired and it detected some per-
formance errors.
If one or more alarms are active (see note 6) means that the counter(s) have exceeded their
threshold value.
Incomplete (IN) (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corre-
sponding observation period.
The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also
when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily re-
cords are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
Lost (LO) (red). The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance
because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have
forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
Restarted (RE) (red). The record has been lost after a reset of the equipment.
When the equipment has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a
certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this
status.

---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under exam-
ination, the measure was not activated.
(6) Status of the threshold exceeding alarms and configuration parameters. These fields change
according to the selected measure:
G828 measures
15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
UAS. Unavailability alarm.
RxPwr measure
Rlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the received power actually set. These parameters can
be configured by the user.
TxPwr measure
Tlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These parameters
can be configured by the user.
ACM measure
15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the pri-
mary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily
observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
The colour of the alarm boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Grey. Alarm deactivated.

G828 > ODU <radio branch>

RxPwr > ODU <radio branch>
TxPwr > ODU <radio branch>
ACM > <Radio Link name>
G828 > ODU <radio branch>
WARNING The G828 > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0)
or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration.
The G828 > ODU <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one er-
rored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > 30% or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption
of the signal at reception.
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
RxPwr > ODU <radio branch>
WARNING The RxPwr > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0)
The RxPwr > ODU <radio branch> measure checks the power of signal at reception.
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the ob-
servation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
TxPwr > ODU <radio branch>
WARNING The TxPwr > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0)

The TxPwr > ODU <radio branch> measure checks the power of signal at transmission.
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
ACM > <Radio Link name>
WARNING Measure available and meaningful if the adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM > <Radio Link name> traces the trend of the ACM profiles (receiver) in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and further counters (Unavailable, UpShift and
DownShift):
4QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile
ACM 4QAM Str has been active.
4QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM
4QAM has been active.
16QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile
ACM 16QAM Str has been active.
16QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile
ACM 16QAM has been active.
ACM ACM 32QAM has been active.
512QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the pro-
file ACM 512QAM Str has been active.
ACM 512QAM.
1024QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the pro-
file ACM 1024QAM Str has been active.
Unavailable. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the count
has not been possible because the current ACM profile was not connected to the radio.
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
WARNING The representation in graphical and table format of the counter results (see Fig.3) uses a counter
resolution with granularity of 1 second. If the modulation change has lasted for less than 1 second, it will
not be indicated by the modulation counters (4QAM Str, 4QAM, etc.) but by the counter DownShift or Up-
shift.
The availability of the modulations changes according to the radio configuration (see Tab.5).

PM measures (info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condi-
tion generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the thresh-
old limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommen-
dations (eg. G.828, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the equipment starts the storing of the values relevant to the
control parameters.
The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each record contains the values recorded into a
specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary re-
cords) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as ob-
servation period 11.4000.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records rele-
vant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.
If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will succes-
sively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the pre-
ceding records.
See also
Performance Monitoring (command)

PM measures (info)

Report & Logger
The Report & Logger command manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations ex-
ecuted by the users and the equipment configuration.
With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently active on the
equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller (alarm history).
With log of the operations we mean the list of the operations executed by all the users who can connect to
the equipment. The list is stored in the equipment controller.
Operations
Save the log of the equipment alarms
Delete the log of the equipment alarms
Save the log of the operations executed by the users
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users
Save the equipment configuration
GUI
Report & Logger contextual area
See also
Save the log of the equipment alarms
1. Select Main > Report & Logger.
2. Press Alarm Log.

In the Alarm Log window are displayed:
Equipment Info. General parameters:
Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.
Current Alarm Log and History Alarm Log. Respectively list of the current alarms and history
alarms. Every single record identifies an alarm with the following information:
Severity. Alarm severity.
Status. Alarm status.
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm respectively with the Warning, Minor, Ma-
jor or Critical severity.
Status. Alarm status:
On. Alarm active.
Off. Alarm inactive (detected/cleared alarm). Meaningful only for alarm history.
Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the alarm. The format of date/time
changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the alarm.
3. Press Download Report.
4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Alarm Log window.

Delete the log of the equipment alarms
1. Select Main > Report & Logger
2. Press Reset Alarm Logger and confirm.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
Save the log of the operations executed by the users
2. Press Command Log.

In the Command Log window are displayed:
Equipment Info. General parameters:
Current Command Log. Operations list. Every record identifies an operation for which are re-
ported:
Performer. Type of user who has performed the operation:
web. User of WEB LCT application.
snmp. User of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system (NMS5UX user).
cli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via serial line.
remoteCli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet.
Action. Action performed by the user.
Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
Value Set. Set value.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
Source Address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the opera-
tion.
Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/
time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
The empty box indicates that the information is not available, because not meaningful for the relevant
type of operation.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Command Log window.
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users
1. Select Main > Report & Logger
2. Press Reset Command Logger and confirm.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

Save the equipment configuration
2. Press Inventory Report.

In the Inventory Report window are displayed:
Equip Info. General parameters:
HW Inventory, SW Inventory, SW list, etc. Equipment parameters.
The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups.
The format of the parameters present in each group is self-explicative and changes according
to the type of represented data.

The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Inventory Report window.

Report & Logger contextual area
The contextual area allows to save the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by
the users and the equipment configuration.
Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Reset Alarm Logger. Delete the log of the equipment alarms

Reset Command Logger. Delete the log of the operations executed by the users
Alarm Log. Save the log of the equipment alarms
Command Log. Save the log of the operations executed by the users
Inventory Report. Save the equipment configuration
See also
Report & Logger (command)

NMS Wake Up Config.
The NMS Wake Up Config. command manages the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Operations
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
GUI
NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area
See also
Wake Up functionality (info)
1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config.

The NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the
current setting of the relevant sending parameters.
WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake
Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and
them modify them.
2. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
3. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout (Minutes) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
4. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
5. Select the Enable option.

2. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0).

The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.
Parameter
Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP ad-
dress of the server (option NMS IP Address).
NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different man-
agement system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UX-
B or NMS5LX does not use this information.
Push-button
See also
NMS Wake Up Config. (command)

The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
Auto Discovery
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the
supervision systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not man-
aged by the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is re-
ported in the relevant documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The imple-
mentation of the Wake Up functionality is the following.
WEB LCT
Via WEB LCT application, it is possible:
Define the IP address of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option) is installed.
Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the
trap is automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the
user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from
0.0.0.0) as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable op-
tion.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the
NMS IP Address option (value 0.0.0.0).
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap
every minute for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the val-
ue 60 has been set as timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the
sending of the trap is automatically disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the
Wake Up notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables
the sending of the Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
See also
NMS Wake Up Config. (command)

Software Info & Maint.
The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the
default equipment settings.
Operations
Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment
Update the software/firmware of the equipment
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
Restore Factory Default of the equipment
GUI
Software Info & Maint contextual area
See also
Equipment software/firmware (info)
Factory Default of the equipment (info)
Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware and
the WEB LCT version present into the equipment.
Update the software/firmware of the equipment
configured for the FTP Server and the file for the update must be present into a sub-folder of
the Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
This operation cannot be executed when the update is already in progress (Download Status parameter -
Downloading value).
The software/firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions.
1. Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Press Upgrade.
3. In the box Download file path, type the path/name of the file you wish to use for update.

The file must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the display of WEB LCT is running).
4. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server or the SSH Server (if not differently
set at the configuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).
5. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option:

Forced, if you are updating the software/firmware of main controller of the equipment.
Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the software/firmware of periph-
eral units (FPGA file and/or application code).
6. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the software/firmware that has
been updated.
7. Press Start and confirm.

Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be for-
warded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the update: the wording Inter-
rupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the bench whose software/firmware you are updat-
ing.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the bench
whose software/firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which
requires some minutes:
Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the software/firmware up-
date, can be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the software/firmware present into the bench memory
and it updates the software/firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated com-
ponents. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of
the software/firmware.
Complete. The update operation is ended.
The Software Version box shows the new software/firmware version.
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.

Memory benches cannot be switched during the software/firmware update (Download Status parameter -
Downloading value) and when the software/firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench
Status parameter - Not Loaded value).
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.

The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.

Restore Factory Default of the equipment
WARNING The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss
of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.
2. Select the Advanced tab.
3. Activate the Factory Default check-box.

At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is dis-
played.
5. Press OK to close the window.
6. Press Restart and confirm.

The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of
the equipment (info).
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.
Operation is no traffic affecting.

2. Select the Advanced tab.

The contextual area displays the equipment software/firmware.
Tabs
Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment software/firmware.
Advanced tab. Factory default.
Push-button
See also
Software Info & Maint. (command)
Equipment Firmware tab
The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment software/firmware.
Table
FIRST TABLE
The table displays the version and the status of the equipment software/firmware:
Software Version. File name and version of the equipment software/firmware respec-
tively present on the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2
(Bench 2 column):
Running. It is on progress the software/firmware relevant to the subject mem-
ory bench.
Loaded. The software/firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not
on progress (StandBy).
Not Loaded. The software/firmware is not present into the memory bench.
Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the software/firmware respec-
tively present on memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
---. Update is not in progress.
Downloading. It is on progress the updating relevant to the memory bench.
Interrupted. The update has been interrupted.
Complete. The update operation is ended.
SECOND TABLE
The table displays the list of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment soft-
ware/firmware. Every row corresponds to a software/firmware element for which is pointed out
in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or
the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Name which usually identifies the type of component:
FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not pro-
vided with a version of the memory benches.
FW_appl. Application code.
Conf, Prog, Init or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.
WEB LCT. WEB Local Craft Terminal application.
Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification
code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a dif-
ferent code type).

Release Bench 1. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the
controller.
Release Bench 2. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the
controller.
Push-button
Upgrade. Update the software/firmware of the equipment.
Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.
See also
Advanced tab
WARNING Tab available only to users with Administrator profile.
The tab displays the parameters to restore the factory default of the equipment.
Parameters
Factory default. Box to Restore Factory Default of the equipment.
Push-button
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
See also

The software/firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management
of the entire equipment and WEB LCT application.
The software/firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two mem-
ory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one software/firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equip-
ment.
It is possible to update the software/firmware of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time.
The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
Here below the impact of every equipment download/restart operation on the traffic is reported.
Operation Traffic
Restart software No traffic affecting
Bench Switch Traffic affecting
Power Off/On Traffic affecting
Download sw/fw No traffic affecting
See also

Through the WEB LCT application, the Factory Default settings of equipment can be restored (see Restore
Factory Default of the equipment).
At the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, etc.).
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: admin - Password: admin.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.2.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU. The equipment keeps always in mem-
ory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected to the IDU,
the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to equipment configured
with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default addresses.
Tab.2 Factory Default
Parameter IP Address NetMask ODU
IP Address 172.20.254.14 255.255.0.0 Low

Agent IP Address
172.20.255.15 255.255.0.0 High
Default Gateway 255.255.255.255* - Low
255.255.255.255* - High
* Value equivalent to null.
See also

Backup/Restore Config.
The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Operations
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last oper-
ation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
GUI
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
See also
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)
configured for the FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on ones PC (see SSH protocol (info)).
1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.
set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).
Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which
has made the request.
3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file
with bak extension.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present
in the file will be overwritten.
4. Press Backup and confirm.

A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

configured for the FTP Server and the file with the configuration must be present into a sub-
folder of the Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol
(info).
3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
4. Press Restore and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
configured for the FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

The Reverte parameter shows the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program
before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in ones operating system.
The wording --- shows that the file is not available.

3. Press Revert and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.

The contextual area displays the parameters to save and restore the whole equipment configuration.
Parameters
Backup file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to save the whole equipment con-
figuration to.
Restore file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to use for the restore of the pre-
viously saved configuration.
FTP Server IP Addr. IP address of the FTP Server or of the SSH Server used for the file trans-
fer.
The address 0.0.0.0 indicates that the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the man-
ager which has made the request.
Reverte. Date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last re-
store operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in ones operating system. The
wording --- shows that the file is not available.
Push-button
Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)

Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
See also
Backup/Restore Config. (command)

Backup
The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the
user needs.
Restore
In any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the
data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps
it available until the successive restore operation.
Revert
In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the
program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for equipment: one executed by the
user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.
See also
Backup/Restore Config. (command)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last oper-
ation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

Alarm Severity Config.
The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity.
Operations
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
Enable/disable an alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
Change the severity of an alarm
GUI
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area
See also
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Enable/disable an alarm
2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting:
Disable, to disable the alarm.
Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity to be assigned to the alarm
4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
WARNING It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm
(see Enable/disable an alarm).

3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting:
Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
4. Press Ok.
Change the severity of an alarm
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modify-
ing the alarm severity, automatically enables it.
4. Press Ok.

The contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Alarms are subdivided into groups.

When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column).
To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol next to the name
of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the pre-
vious one (if compress it is expanded and vice versa).
When a group is expanded, for every alarm is displayed the characteristics.
The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
Parameters
Group/Alarm. Alarm name.
A colour box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity:
White box with red X. Alarm disabled.
Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.
Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.
Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.
Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.
The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name shows that at least one
characteristic of the alarm has been changed.
Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if it is enabled, the relevant severity:
Disabled. Alarm disabled.
Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version
present into the equipment controller.
Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap:

Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.
Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management sys-
tem is disabled (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.
Push-button
Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an
alarm or Change the severity of an alarm
See also
Alarm Severity Config. (command)

The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction but a status change, an operation
in progress or an operating indication are defined status signals.
The term event defines every signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 500 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.
Displaying alarms
The list of the current alarms is indicates in the Equipment status area.
Enabling/disabling alarms
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management pro-
gram: as the alarm had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected,
this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is ena-
bled (see next item), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in
the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm is independent for each alarm and local to the
equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each alarm of each equipment.
Enabling/disabling traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by
the equipment to a possible external management system, for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according
to his own needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equip-
ment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm,
this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system,
which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm
and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must
be executed for each alarm of each equipment.
Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the local management program has an associated
severity which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.
Alarms log
With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently ac-
tive on the equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller
(alarm history).
WEB LCT allows to Save the log of the equipment alarms and to Delete the log of the equipment
alarms.
See also
Alarm Severity Config. (command)

Group/User Management
Groups. It manages the user groups.

Users. It manages the users (users list of the equipment).
Permanent Login. It manages the IP address of Permanent Login.
Logged Users. It manages the users connected to equipment.

Groups
The Groups command manages the user groups of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the user groups
Add a user group
Modify a user group
Delete a user group
GUI
Groups contextual area
See also
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SSH protocol (info)
Verify the user groups
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups.

The Groups contextual area displays the list of the user groups currently stored in the equipment.
Add a user group
WARNING It is possible to set a maximum of 10 groups (see Limits).
2. Press Add Group.
3. Into the Name box, type the group name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up
to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 09, az and AZ).
The parameter is Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different groups present into the same list.
The parameter can not be changed later.
4. Set the profile you wish to assign to the user who will belong to the group in the Profile box:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Moreover, every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides being a WEB user,
is even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is automatically enabled by the sys-
tem to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operat-
ing System).
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the

user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Admin. user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.
Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
5. Define the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to the group (Allowed Protocols pa-
rameter):
HTTP. HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.
HTTPS. HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL. It is a variation of HTTP protocol and uses, be-
sides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and
the authentication of the transmitted data.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol which allows monitoring and controlling
the network devices.
If you activate this protocol, select the relevant version:
SNMPv1. First version.
SNMPv2c. Second version.
SNMPv3. Third version.
FTP. File Transfer Protocol. Protocol for the file transfer.
SFTP. SSH File Transfer Protocol. Protocol for the secure file transfer.
SSH. Secure SHell. Protocol for the secure and encrypted access.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the
users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.
At least one protocol must be activated.
6. Press OK and confirm.
The new group is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a user group
WARNING The Name and CLI parameter cannot be modified.

A group with at least one associated user cannot be modified. First delete the users and then modify the
group.
2. To modify the profile of the users associated to a group, select the relevant Profile box and then the
option:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the
user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Admin. user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.
The parameter of the last group with profile Administrator cannot be modified.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
3. To change the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to a group, select the relevant box:
HTTP. Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol).
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.
HTTPS. Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL).

SNMP. SNMP protocol. Select the option:
Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.
SNMPv1. Protocol SNMPv1 enabled.
SNMPv2c. Protocol SNMPv2c enabled.
SNMPv3. Protocol SNMPv3 enabled.
FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP.
SFTP. SSH File Transfer Protocol: protocol for the secure file transfer.
SSH. Secure SHell: protocol for the secure and encrypted access.
At least one protocol must be active.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
Delete a user group
WARNING A group with at least one associated user cannot be deleted. First delete the users and then the
group.
This operation is not available if the default group Admin is selected.
2. Select the group.

3. Press Remove Group and confirm.

The contextual area displays the list of the users groups of the equipment.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a group for which are indicated:
Name. Group name
Profile. Profile of the users associated to the group:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and
send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send
commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the
following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the
equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only
to the Admin. user.
Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute
only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual
area.
CLI. Permission of the user to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS
(Siae Microelettronica - Operating System).
The active box ( ) indicates that the WEB user is even a CLI user, the inactive box in-
dicates that the WEB user is not a CLI User too.
The parameter is read-only because the setting is automatically made by WEB LCT, ac-
cording to the profile defined during the group creation: only the users belonging to
groups with profile Admin have the functionality CLI enabled.
HTTP. Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol): protocol used to transfer hypertext
pages on the WEB.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session
opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be
available.
HTTPS. Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL): variation of HTTP pro-
tocol and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which imple-
ments the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.
available.
SNMP. Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol): protocol which allows
monitoring and controlling the network devices. Option:
Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.
SNMPv1. First version.
SNMPv2c. Second version.
SNMPv3. Third version.
FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP.
available.
SFTP. Protocol (SSH File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the secure file transfer.
available.
SSH. Protocol (Secure SHell): protocol for the secure and encrypted access.
available.
Push-button

Add Group. Add a user group.

Remove Group. Delete a user group.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
See also
Groups (command)
SSH protocol (info)

HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transfer hypertext pages within WEB.
All HTTP traffic takes place via the TCP/IP protocol on port 80 of PC.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) is a variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol,
SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmit-
ted data. All HTTPS traffic takes place on port 443 of PC.
In web browsers, URI which refers to this technology is named https.
For more information about RFC 2818 specification (HTTP Over TLS).
AGS-20
Equipment can operate with HTTP protocol or HTTPS protocol.
Protocols are implemented in exclusive mode in such a way that, when a user connects via HTT-
PS, HTTP requests will be re-addressed to HTTPS and vice versa.
The use of the protocol HTTP and/or HTTPS at equipment level can be enabled in any moment
(see Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol).
If the operator enables both the HTTP protocol and the HTTPS protocol, the system will auto-
matically use the more secure protocol (HTTPS).
The utilization of a protocol during a WEB LCT session depends even on the enabling state of the
user, who has opened the session, in relation to the use of this protocol. The protocols enabled
for one user depend on the group associated to the user (see Group/User Management).
Example. If the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of HTTPS protocol but
only HTTP, this user can open the WEB LCT session only in HTTP mode even if the HTTPS pro-
tocol is enabled in the Services Status Config contextual area. In the same way, if the user XY
is associated to a group enabled to the use of HTTPS and HTTP protocol, but the HTTPS protocol
is disabled in the Services Status Config contextual area, the user XY can open the WEB LCT
session in HTTP mode.
As general rule, for the correct use of one protocol, it is necessary that the protocol is enabled
to the use and that the user who opens the WEB LCT session is associated to a group enabled
to the use of the same protocol.
First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses
HTTP protocol.
The protocol (HTTP or HTTPS) used to open the WEB CT page is defined at level of NMS system.
HTTPS (AGS-20) - SSL certificate

Enabling HTTPS protocol is possible only if you have a digital certificate SSL for WEB Server.
Main aim of this certificate is to authenticate the server (for example, AGS-20 equipment) at the
customers (e.g., user PC where the WEB LCT page relevant to equipment is opened).
SSL foresees that, on connection, the server provides its certificate; if the certificate is signed
by a recognised certification Authority (Trusted certificates), then a secure communication can
be started.
From the physical point of view, the certificate is a file containing the information relevant to the
issuing authority, to the subject of certificate and additional information indicating the use which
the certificate has been released for.
WARNING AGS-20 equipment is not provided with SSL certificates when it is put in field. More-
over, the restore of Factory Default deletes possible certificates already loaded on equipment.
How to get a SSL Trusted certificate

You can get a SSL certificate requiring it to a recognised certification authority (Certification Au-
thority - CA), that is a public authority enable to the univocal emission of certificates.
The Certification Authority ensures the identity of the owner of the certificate signing the public
and private keys by its own private key.
The procedure to request the certificate can change from CA to CA depending on the required
information and on the procedure for the generation and the communication of the pair of key
(see documentation of specific CA).

Generally, all CAs will require to provide a CSR (Certificate Signing Request), that is a request
containing the data which shall be certificated. To generate the CSR of an equipment see Gen-
erate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment.
The generation of CSR includes also the generation of a Private Key, which will not be included
in CSR itself will be used only to sign the request of certificate.
The information to include in CSR changes depending on the context for which you request the
certification. CA will define which information is useful.
In any case the name/address of server (Common Name), which you require the certificate for,
will be required.
For the generation of SSL certificates relevant to AGS-20 equipment, the Common Name of the
certificate must correspond to the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use the
certificate (for more information, see Certificate license - AGS-20 hereinafter in the chapter).
With IP address we mean the address entered in the URL of the browser to open the page WEB
LCT.
As result of the certification request, CA will provide the file relevant to final SSL certificate. This
file must be loaded on the equipment (see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment).
SSL UnTrusted certificates - AGS-20

It is possible to create, and load on the equipment, certificates self-generated by the user (e.g.
via OpenSSL).
The self-signed certificates (UnTrusted certificates) are not generally considered trustworthy by
browsers. They are useful for verification purpose, but the standard use of them does not ensure
the security of server-client connection.
To ensure the security within an equipment network, it is necessary to use certificates signed
by a certification authority (Trusted certificates).
Certificate license - AGS-20

The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are spe-
cific with respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released.
During the authentication of a server (equipment) at a client (user PC), one of the first executed
check consists in comparing the value of the field Common Name present in the certificate with
the URL of the web page you are opening.
The equipment WEB LCT page is opened at URL //<equipment IP address>. This involves that
the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the equipment IP address.
So, if you wish to migrate a whole network of AGS-20 equipment from HTTP protocol to HTTPS
protocol, it is necessary to have a SSL certificate for every equipment where the relevant Com-
mon Name corresponds to the equipment IP address.
Certificate expiry - AGS-20

Generally, SSL certificates have a quite long expiry.
When the certificates on the equipment expiry, they must be replaced with new valid certificates
by means of the procedures Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment and
Download the SSL certificate in an equipment.
How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20

In summary, the operations to perform in order to implement the use of the protocol HTTPS on
AGS-20 equipment are the following:
Open the WEB LCT page of the equipment for which you wish to generate the request
of the certificate (CSR).
Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment.
During this operation, set the IP address of the equipment indicated in the URL of the
WEB page to Common Name.
The system, besides generating the CSR, will send the private RSA key to the equip-
ment.
Copy the CSR and paste it to a text file.
Send the CST to the chosen CA.
When CA will send the file containing the SSL certificate signed, load it to the equip-
ment (see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment).

Verify that the group, which the user used to open the HTTPS session with the equip-
ment is associated to, is enabled. Otherwise, it is necessary to enabled him (see
Groups contextual area/Users contextual area).
Verify that the protocol HTTPS at equipment level is enabled, otherwise it is necessary
to enable it (see Services Status Config contextual area).
SSL and TLS protocol

The protocols SSL (Secure Socket Layer) and TLS (Transport Layer Security) are encryption pro-
tocols which allow a secure communication in TCP/IP networks.
As indicated at the beginning of the chapter, the protocol HTTPS is a variation of HTTP which
uses the SSL level for the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.
In order to do this, the protocols SSL/TLS use three main functionalities:
Authentication. The authentication of the identity in the connections can be executed
using the encryption with public key (e.g., RSA, DSS etc.).
Security. In order to ensure a secure connection between two users involved in a
communication, the data are protected using encryption algorithms with symmetric
key (e.g., DES, RC4, etc.).
Reliability. The transport level includes a check on the integrity of the message based
on a proper MAC (Message Authentication Code) which uses secure hash functions
(e.g., SHA, MD5 etc.). In this way, you can verify that the data transmitted between
client and server have not been altered during the transmission.
SSL and TLS protocol - AGS-20

AGS-20 equipment uses the protocol TLS version 1.
The user can choose, from the list of CipherSuite, the combination of encryption algorithms sup-
ported by the client, sorted according his preferences.
In detail, the list of CipherSuite indicates:
The algorithm for the Key Exchange.
The CipherSpec containing the data encryption algorithm (Cipher) with the possible
implementation characteristics and the algorithm for the Message Authentication
Code (Hash).
AGS-20 equipment manages the following CipherSuite.
CipherSuite Key Exchange Cipher Hash

RSA-3DES-SHA RSA 3DES SHA
RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA RSA AES-128-CBC SHA
RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA RSA AES-256-CBC SHA
See also
Groups (command)
Services Status Config (command)
SSL/HTTP Secure (command)

The SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.

The main differences between SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 are the management of message security and the
control of the accesses.
SNMPv1/v2c
The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are
passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3
The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection
of the messages and the control of the access.
In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the
packets.
In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenti-
cated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code.
Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet contain-
ing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the
key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if allowing the user an access:
Without authentication (noAuthNoPriv).
With authentication (AuthNoPriv).
With authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).
For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications.
AGS-20
The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol and with SNMPv3 protocol.
In order to preserve the security, SNMPv3 protocol must be used.
The use of the protocol SNMPv1/v2c and/or SNMPv3 can be enabled at equipment level in any
moment (see Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol).
The use of a protocol during a WEB LCT session, however, depends on the enabling state of the
use of this protocol by the user who has opened the session. The protocols enabled for a user
depend on the group associated to the user (see Backup/Restore Config.).
Example. If the user XY is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol SNMPv3, a
WEB LCT session opened by the user XY will accept and process only SNMPv3 packets; the re-
ceived SNMPv1/v2c packets will be dropped.
In analogous way, if the user YZ is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol
SNMPv2c, a WEB LCT session opened by the user YZ will accept and process only SNMPv1/v2c
packets.
First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses
SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Tab.3 displays, for every SNMP version, the security levels (noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, Auth-
Priv) supported by the equipment and the description of the provided security mechanisms.

Tab.3 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3
Security Security level Authentication Encryption Description Notes

model
SNMPv1/v2c noAuthNoPriv Community No Community-based authentica- This security level is automatically as-
String tion: the passwords are trans- signed to a user by the system when the
mitted not encrypted and user is associated, during the creation
displayed in the traces procedure, to a group using the protocol
SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c*.
SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Username No Authentication based on user This security level is automatically as-
name signed to a user by the system when the
user is associated, during the creation
procedure, to a group using the protocol
SNMPv3*.
AuthNoPriv MD5 or SHA No Authentication based on algo- This security level is automatically as-
rithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC- signed to a user by the system when,
SHA during the creation procedure:
The user is associated to a group us-
ing the protocol SNMPv3*.
The authentication algorithm/pass-
word is defined to the user*.
AuthPriv MD5 or SHA DES 56 Authentication based on algo- This security level is automatically as-
rithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC- signed to a user by the system when,
SHA and encryption with algo- during the creation procedure:
rithm CBC-DES (DES-56) in The user is associated to a group us-
addition to authentication ing the protocol SNMPv3*.
The authentication algorithm/pass-
word and the encryption algorithm/
password are defined to the user*.
* See Add a user.
See also
Groups (command)
Users (command)

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are two protocols for the file transfer
based on TCP.
Main difference between FTP and SFTP is the management of security.
The FTP protocol does not foresee the data encryption, while the SFTP protocol is based on SSH protocol
for the data encryption and the secure file transfer.
AGS-20
The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP
protocol.
The use of the protocol FTP and/or SFTP can be enabled in any moment (see Enable/disable the
FTP and/or SFTP protocol).
If the operator enables the protocols FTP and SFTP at the same time, the system will automat-
ically use the most secure protocols (SFTP).
The utilization of a protocol during a WEB LCT session depends even on the enabling state of the
user, who has opened the session, in relation to the use of this protocol. The protocols enabled
for one user depend on the group associated to the user (see Group/User Management).
Example. If the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of the protocol SFTP,
even if the protocol SFTP is enabled in the Ftp/Sftp contextual area, the file transfer between PC
and equipment during a WEB LCT session opened by XY will take place via FTP. In the same way,
if the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of the protocol SFTP, but the pro-
tocol SFTP is not enabled in the context area Ftp/Sftp, the file transfer between PC and equip-
ment during a WEB LCT session opened by XY will take place via FTP.
When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default
setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore
Config.), the equipment uses the FTP protocol.
The management of the protocol for the file transfer (FTP or SFTP) between NMS and equipment
is defined at NMS level and, for the current system version, is always FTP.
FTP protocol- AGS-20

The default FTP credentials of the equipment are: user Anonymous, no password.
The FTP credentials can be changed at ones wish (see Modify the FTP access credentials).
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT
page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application,
in order to manage the FTP protocol.
The instructions for the installation and use of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported
in the relevant manuals.
To manage the FTP protocol, as tool auxiliary to WEB LCT application, it is necessary to install
and run one of the following programs:
Web Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later.
When the program is started, the FTP server provided with the program itself is automat-
ically started.
The server does not perform any check on the credentials.
For the download operations, it is sufficient to enter the complete path where the file re-
sides.
At start-up of WLC, if a FTP Server is already active, the FTP server available with the
program is not started. This condition is signalled by a message.
Standard FTP Server (e.g., free FTP Server FileZilla).
If you use your own FTP Server, it must be installed and configured if not already present
on the PC.
The configuration consists in defining the users and the path (Shared Folder) used later
for the file transfer.

USERS. For a correct management of the data transfer, the credential used to access to
WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server.
For this reason, it is suggested to configure, for the FTP Server, the users present in the
equipment user list with whom the download/upload operations are executed.
PATH. Define the path of Shared Folder for the file transfer.
The path will be used to save the files in the upload operations and shall be the path
(even partial) where are present the files for the download operations.
It is suggested not to save the files in C:\, but to create a sub-folder and set it for the
file saving (e.g. C:\ftp or C:\backup). This allows saving the backup files without being
Administrator users (some Windows versions require to be Administrator user to save the
file in C:\).
SFTP protocol - AGS-20

The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page.
The SFTP credentials can be changed at ones wish (see Modify the SFTP access credentials.
For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user
(or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server.
The change of credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page
will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
As help for the WEB LCT application in order to manage the protocol SFTP, it is necessary to
install and configure a SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
See also
Groups (command)
Ftp/Sftp (command)

Installation and configuration of SSH server
1. Install the free SSH server freeSSHd.
a. Execute the guided installation of freeSSHd.exe.
b. When asked Do you want to run FreeSSHd as a system service? press No.
2. Verify that, during the program installation, a service has not been installed in Windows.
a. Open the Windows Task Manager window.
b. Select the Services tab.
c. Press Services.
d. Verify that the list does not contain the option FreeSSHDServices.
e. If present, select it, open the Properties window and set the parameter Startup type -> Manual.
3. Configure the SSH server.
a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the SSH tab.
c. Activate the Start SSH server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
d. Select the Telnet tab.
e. Deactivate the Start Telnet server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
f. Select the Authentication tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Password authentication -> Allowed.
Public key authentication -> Allowed.
If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply.
g. Select the Encryption box and verify the setting of the parameter:
Allowed ciphers -> Any.
If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
h. Select the Tunneling tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Allow local port forwarding -> inactive box.
Allow remote port forwarding -> inactive box.
i. Select the SFTP tab, in the SFTP home path set the path of the home directory for the file trans-
fer and press Apply.
The file path must be in C:\. It is suggested NOT to save the files in C:\, but to create a subfolder
in C and set it to save the files (for instance, C:\ftps or C:\backup).
This allows saving the backup files without being Administrator user (in some version of Win-
dows, in order to save the files in C:\, it is necessary to be Administrator user).
j. Select the Automatic updates tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:
Check for new version on startup -> inactive box.
Update without asking me for confirmation -> inactive box.
Show info messages from freeSSHd.com -> inactive box.
k. Select the Logging tab, in the Log file box set the path/filename to save the log file and press
Apply.
l. Select the Host restrictions tab and verify the setting of the parameter:
Refuse these IP addresses -> active box.
If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
m. Select the Users tab, press Add and create the SFTP users setting the following characteristics
and press OK.
Login -> User name
Authorization -> Password stored as SHA1 hash.

Password/Password (again) -> Access code.
User can use -> Shell, SFTP.
WARNING It is suggested to create the users presents in the user list of the equipment because
the equipment uses, as default SFTP credentials, the same of the user used to access the WEB
LCT page.
4. Restart the SSH server and verify its status.
a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the Server status tab and verify that:

The Telnet server is not running (Telnet server is not running).
the SSH server is running (SSH server is running).
WARNING After the configuration of SSH server, if the one or more parameters must be changed, to make
the change operative, restart the server selecting the Unload command present in the contextual menu of
the FreeSSHD Service application.
See also

SSH protocol (info)
SSH (Secure SHell) protocol allows implementing secure connections between two system, using a client/
server architecture.
SSH protocol is available in two versions: version 1 (SSH1) and version 2 (SSH2).
Documents defining the protocol can be found at http://www.ietf.org.
AGS-20
The equipment can operate with protocol SSH1 and/or SSH2.
Besides the selection of the protocol version, it is possible to define the authentication and en-
cryption algorithms managed by the equipment. These configurations can be executed by CLI
(application SM-OS): refer to CLI for more information.
By means of WEB LCT, the use of the protocol SSH can be enabled/disabled (see Enable/disable
the operating of a communication protocol).
For the correct use of the protocol SSH, it is necessary that the user, who opens the WEB LCT
session, is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol itself (see Group/User Man-
agement).
When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default
setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore
Config.), the SSH protocol is disabled (SSH2 version).
See also
Groups (command)

Users
The Users command manages the users (WEB and SNMP) of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the user list
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user
GUI
Users contextual area
See also
Groups (command)
Verify the user list
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users.

The Users contextual area displays the list of the users (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equip-
ment.
Add a user
WARNING It is possible to set a maximum of 10 users (see Limits).
2. Select Add User.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up to
31, the accepted and recognized characters are 09, az and AZ).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list.
4. Press Change at the side of the Password parameter.
5. Into the New Password and Confirm New Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric
string with a number of characters from 4 up to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 09,
az and AZ) and press OK.
The fields are Case Sensitive. Pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
6. Set the group, to which you wish to associate the user, in the Group box.
The user will inherit the group characteristics: profile and use of the protocols HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP,
SFTP and SSH.
7. In the Timeout box, set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. If you wish:

The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an infinity period
(session timeout disabled), set the value 0.
The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once
reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), set a value between 1 and 3600 sec.
(1h).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
8. Only if the user you are creating belongs to a group for which the SNMP3 protocol has been set, execute
the following steps:
a. Set, in the Auth Protocol box, the authentication protocol (algorithm) associated to the user:
None. No authentication algorithm.
MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.
SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest
based on hash code (HMAC).
b. Press Change at the side of the Auth Key parameter.
c. Set, in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, the authentication password asso-
ciated to the user (alphanumeric string of at least 4 characters and at most 31 characters. The
characters accepted and recognised are 09, az and AZ) and press OK.
d. Set, in the Priv Protocol box, the cypher protocol (algorithm) associated to the user:
None. No cypher algorithm.
DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the
repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) cypher algorithm.
e. Press Change at the side of the Priv Key parameter.
f. Set, in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, the cypher password associated to
the user (alphanumeric string of at least 4 characters and at most 31 characters. The characters
accepted and recognised are 09, az and AZ) and press OK.
9. .Press OK and confirm.

The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a user
2. Select the user and press Modify User or double click on the user.
3. Execute the changing.

The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user.
The parameter User, Group, Auth Protocol and Priv Protocol can NOT be changed. To change them, it
is necessary to delete the user and create him again with the wished characteristics.
The fields for the setting of the password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase
characters.
4. Press OK and confirm.

Delete a user
WARNING The operation is not available if the selected user is the current user or the last user with Ad-
ministrator profile.
2. Select the user.
3. Press Remove User and confirm.

The contextual area displays the user list (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equipment.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a user for which are indicated:
User. User name.
Group. Group which the user is associated to.
Profile. User profile:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and
send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send
commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the
following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the
equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only
to the Admin. user.
only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual
area.
Auth. Authentication protocol (algorithm) associated to the user:
None. No authentication algorithm.
MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash
code.
SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit di-
gest based on hash code (HMAC).
Parameter meaningful only for users associated to a group with protocol SNMPv3 ena-
bled.
Priv. Cypher protocol (algorithm) associated to the user:
None. No cypher algorithm.
DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on
the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.
AES. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) cypher algorithm.
Parameter meaningful only for users associated to a group with protocol SNMPv3 ena-
bled.
Timeout. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user:
O. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if dis-
connected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.
<number>. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page
has been closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been exe-
cuted (user logout).
Push-button
Add User. Add a user.

Remove User. Delete a user
Modify User. Modify a user.
See also
Users (command)

Users list
The user list is a list of the users who can connect and require to login to the equipment by the
WEB LCT application (WEB user) or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX program (SNMP user).
If an user is not present in the list stored in the equipment controller, that user cannot connect
and/or login to the that equipment.
Users are subdivided into groups (for details, see successive paragraphs).
Before creating an user, it is necessary to create the group which the user must be associated
to. One group can contain more users, but one specific user can belong to only one group.
A maximum of 10 groups and 10 users can be created in the equipment user list.
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
and a default user are available. Then, through WEB LCT application, new users and groups can
be created, modified and deleted.
The management of the user list can be performed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
Groups
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which it is possible to define a profile
and the enabling to the use of HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP e SSH protocols.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of a group are:
Name of the group. The name of the group must be unique within an user list.
The name of the group, once assigned, cannot be changed.
Profile which will be automatically assigned to the users associated to the group:
Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send
commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
Moreover, every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides be-
ing a WEB user, is even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is
automatically enabled by the system to access to the equipment even by the ap-
plication SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System).
Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send com-
mands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force
the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.
only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.
Protocols which will be available to the users assigned to the group:
Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol), used to transfer hypertext pages on
the WEB.
Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL): variation of HTTP proto-
col and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which im-
plements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.
Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), which allows monitoring
and controlling the network device. The user can activate the use of the first ver-
sion (SNMPv1), the second version (SNMPv2c) or the third version (SNMPv3) of
the protocol.
Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol), for the file transfer based on TCP.
Protocol SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the secure file transfer.
Protocol SSH (Secure SHell Protocol): protocol for the secure and encrypted ac-
cess.
More options can be enabled at the same time.
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
is available with the following characteristics:
Name: Admin.
Profile: Administrator.

Enabled protocols: HTTP, FTP and SNMPv1.
The default group can be changed but not deleted.
Via WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user groups and only one user with Adminis-
trator profile can Add a user group, Modify a user group or Delete a user group.
Users
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which a profile and the enabling to
the use of the HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP and SSH protocols can be defined.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of an user are:
Name/Password. Name and access password, which allow the program recognizing the
user as authorized.
The same user can open more WEB LCT page relevant to different equipment.
The name of an user must be unique within an user list.
The name of an user, once assigned, cannot be changed.
Group which the user is associated to and from which the user inherits the profile and
the enabling to the use of HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP and SSH protocols.
Every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides being a WEB user, is
even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is automatically enabled by the
system to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS SM-OS (Siae Micro-
elettronica - Operating System).
Timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. It is possible to:
Disable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnect-
ed) will be preserved for an indefinite period of time.
Enable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will
be automatically terminated once the set time period is reached.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session for which the relevant
WEB LCT page has been closed, but the disconnection from the equipment has not
been performed (user logout).
At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default user
is available with the following characteristics:
User: admin
Password: admin
Group: Admin. (default group - see characteristics in previous paragraph).
Profile: Administrator.
Timeout: 300 sec.
WARNING At the first access, it is suggested to immediately change the password of the default
user in order to limit the risk of intrusion via this account.
The default user can be modified or deleted. The only condition is that there must be at least
one other user with Administrator profile in the user list.
Through WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user list and, only an user with Adminis-
trator profile, Add a user, Modify a user or Delete a user.
NMS5UX user
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system, it is necessary
to create the user used by the supervision system for the connection to the equipment.
This user must be associated to a group with profile Administrator and all the protocols enabled.
More information about the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system is reported in the relevant
documentation.
See also
Groups (command)
Users (command)
Equipment

Permanent Login
The Permanent Login command manages the remote users who have the possibility to be connected to
the equipment (Permanent Login).
The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does
not need for a login password.
A maximum of 2 remote users can be set.
Operations
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
GUI
Permanent Login contextual area
See also
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login.

The Permanent Login contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possi-
bility to be connected to the equipment.
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login.
2. To set/modify the IP address of the machine relevant the:

First remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 1 box.
Second remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 2 box.
Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.

Permanent Login contextual area
The contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possibility to be connected
to the equipment (Permanent Login).
Parameters
Manager IP Address 1. IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
Manager IP Address 2. IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.
Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.
Push-button
See also
Permanent Login (command)

Logged Users
The Logged Users command manages the users connected to the equipment.
Operations
Verify the users connected to the equipment
Force the logout of a user
GUI
Logged Users contextual area
See also
Verify the users connected to the equipment
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users.

The Logged Users contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.
Force the logout of a user
WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.
1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.

Logged Users contextual area
The contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the command is se-
lected.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a user for which are indicated:
User. User name.
The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or
a remote user who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent
Login).
Profile. User profile (see User Profile parameter).
Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session:
0 s. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if
disconnected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.
<number> s. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user,
if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant page has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user
logout).
Login Type. User type:
WEB. User of the WEB LCT application.
SNMP. SNMP user or user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system.
CLI. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet or serial
line.
IP Address. Machine IP address.
With the wording machine, it is intended the PC/server/workstation on which the appli-
cation used by the user is actually running.
Parameter not meaningful for the user of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment
via serial line.
Push-button
Force Logout. Force the logout of a user
See also
Logged Users (command)

Security Management
Services Status Config. It manages the equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, SSH,
HTTPS).
SSL/HTTP Secure. It manages the configuration of the protocol SSL and the SSL certificate (generation
of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment).
Clients. It manages the FTP and SFTP protocols.

Services Status Config
The Services Status Config command manages the equipment communication protocols (services used
by the management program to access to the equipment).
Operations
Verify the operating of the communication protocols
Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol
GUI
Services Status Config contextual area
See also
SSH protocol (info)
Verify the operating of the communication protocols
1. Select Security Management > Services Status Config.

The Services Status Config contextual area shows the name, the administrative status and the operat-
ing status of the services on the equipment.
1. Select Security Management > Services Status Config.

The parameter Admin State indicates the current administrative status of the protocols:
Disable. The protocol is disabled.
Enable. The protocol is enabled.
2. To modify a parameter, select the new value in correspondence of the wished protocol.
The protocol HTTPS can be enabled if:
there is, in the user list, at least one user enabled to use it.
the relevant SSL certificate is present in the equipment (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).

Services Status Config contextual area
The contextual area shows the equipment communication protocols.
Table
Every table row corresponds to a protocol for which are indicated:
Service Name. Name of the protocol (service):
SNMPv1v2c. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol first and
second version: protocol which allows monitoring and controlling the network
devices.
SNMPv3. SNMP protocol third version.
Telnet. TCP-based Client-server network protocol which provides the user with
sessions of remote login.
SSH. SSH (Secure SHell) protocol: protocol for the secure and encrypted ac-
cess.
HTTP. HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) protocol: protocol used to transfer
hypertext pages on the WEB.
HTTPS. HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) protocol: variation of
HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer)
which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted
data.
Admin Status. Administrative state (enabling) of the protocol:
Operative Status. Operating status of the protocol:
Running. The protocol is operating.
Stopped. The protocol is not operating (disabling of the protocol or malfunc-
tion.)
Push-buttons
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on-line.
See also
SSH protocol (info)

SSL/HTTP Secure
The command SSL/HTTP Secure manages the configuration of the protocol SSL and the SSL certificate
(generation of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment).
Operations
Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol
Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment
Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment
Download the SSL certificate in an equipment
GUI
SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area
See also
Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol
1. Select Security Management > SSL/HTTP Secure.

The SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area displays the configuration of the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) pro-
tocol.

The area HTTP Secure Ciphersuite lists the CipherSuite managed by the equipment:
RSA-3DES-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algorithm: 3DES. Algo-
rithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA.
RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algo-
rithm: AES-128-CBC. Algorithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA
RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algo-
rithm: AES-256-CBC. Algorithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA.
2. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the wished options.
4. In order to make the change effective, it is necessary to disable and re-enable the protocol HTTPS:
a. Select Security Management > Services Status Config.
b. In the Admin State box of the HTTPS option, select the Disable value.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
d. In the Admin State box of the HTTPS option, select the Enable value.
e. Press Apply and confirm.

Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment
WARNING This operation is included in the procedure for the implementation of the protocol HTTP for AGS-
20 equipment. Before executing it, read How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20 in HTTP/HTTPS
protocol (info).
2. Press Generate Certificate Signing Request.
3. Set, in the box RSA Key Size, the length of RSA key: 512 or 1024.
4. Set, in the box Common Name, the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use the certifi-
cate.
With IP address we mean the address entered in the URL of the browser to open the page WEB LCT.
5. Press Generate.
The text area displays the CSR. Moreover, the key associated to the certificate request is communicated
to the equipment.
6. Select and copy the content of the area into a text file.
The file shall be sent to the Certificate Authority to obtain the relevant SSL certificate.
7. Press Cancel to close the Generate Certificate Signing Request. window.
Download the SSL certificate in an equipment
WARNING Operation available only if you have the file of to the SSL certificate relevant to the equipment
you are connected to.
The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are specific with
respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released.
For the AGS-20 equipment, the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the IP address of the
equipment for which you wish to use the certificate.
This operation is included in the procedure for the implementation of the protocol HTTP for AGS-20 equip-
ment. Before executing it, read How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20 in HTTP/HTTPS protocol
(info).
2. Press Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Authority.
3. Open, in a text editor, the file relevant to the SSL certificate obtained by the Certificate Authority rel-
evant to the equipment you are connected to and copy it.
4. Paste the SSL certificate to the text area of the window Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Author-
ity.
5. Press Send.
The new certificate is now in use.
The message Invalid certificate indicates that the operation has not been executed because the certi-
fication is corrupted or because the key present on the equipment does not match that of the certificate.

SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area
The contextual area shows the configuration of SSL protocol and allows managing the SSL certificate (gen-
eration of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment).
Parameters
HTTP SECURE CIPHERSUITE
SSL Version. Version of the protocol in use:
TLS-1. Protocol Transport Layer Security version 1.
Read only parameter.
List of CipherSuite managed by the equipment:
RSA-3DES-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algorithm of data en-
cryption: 3DES. Algorithm for the Message Authentication Code: SHA.
RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algo-
rithm of data encryption: AES-128-CBC. Algorithm for the Message Authenti-
cation Code: SHA
RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algo-
rithm of data encryption: AES-256-CBC. Algorithm for the Message Authenti-
cation Code: SHA.
The active box ( ) means that the CipherSuite is in use, the inactive box means that it
is not used.
SSL DIGITAL CERTIFICATE MANAGEMENT

Generate Certificate Signing Request. Generate the Certificate Signing Request for
an equipment
Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Authority. Download the SSL certificate in
an equipment
Push-buttons
See also
SSL/HTTP Secure (command)

Clients
Ftp/Sftp. It manages the FTP and SFTP protocols.

Ftp/Sftp
The command Ftp/Sftp manages the FTP and SFTP protocols on the equipment.
Operations
Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols
Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol
Modify the FTP access credentials
Modify the SFTP access credentials
GUI
Ftp/Sftp contextual area
See also
SSH protocol (info)
Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols
1. Select Security Management > Clients > Ftp/Sftp.

The Ftp/Sftp contextual area displays the operating status of the protocols FTP and SFTP.
WARNING If the operator enables the protocols FTP and SFTP at the same time, the system will automat-
ically use the most secure protocols (SFTP).
2. To ENABLE the protocol:

FTP, set, into the Ftp area, the Enable value (Service Status parameter).
SFTP, set, into the Sftp area, the Enable value (Service Status parameter).
3. To DISABLE the protocol:

FTP, set, into the Ftp area, the Disable value (Service Status parameter).
SFTP, set, into the Sftp area, the Disable value (Service Status parameter).
Modify the FTP access credentials
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of FTP protocol is active and the equipment op-
erates as SSH Client.
The default FTP credentials are: user Anonymous, no password.
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page is
re-opened, the default credentials are used.

2. In Ftp area, press Reset Credentials.
3. Type, in the box User, the new user name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 char-
acters).
4. Type, in the box Password, the new access code (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum
31 characters).
Modify the SFTP access credentials
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of SFTP protocol is active and the equipment op-
erates as SSH Client.
The default SFTP credentials are the same used by user to access to WEB LCT page.
The change of SFTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page is
re-opened, the default credentials are used.
2. In Sftp area, press Reset Credentials.
3. Type, in the box User, the new user name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 char-
acters).
4. Type, in the box Password, the new access code (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum
31 characters).

Ftp/Sftp contextual area
The contextual area displays the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols.
Parameters
FTP
Service Status. Operative status of the FTP protocol:
SFTP
Service Status. Operative status of the SFTP protocol:
Push-buttons
FTP
Reset Credentials. Modify the FTP access credentials
SFTP
Reset Credentials. Modify the SFTP access credentials
See also
Ftp/Sftp (command)
SSH protocol (info)

EQUIPMENT
WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).
Radio Configurator. It displays the radio configuration present on the equipment.

BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and Link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.
Xpic. It manages the XPIC function.

Radio Configurator
WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).
The command Radio Configurator displays the radio configuration present on the equipment.
Operations
Verify the Radio Link configuration
Create a Radio Link
Modify a Radio Link
Delete a Radio Link
Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link
GUI
Radio Configurator contextual area
See also
Radio Link (info)
Verify the Radio Link configuration
1. Select Equipment > Radio Configurator.

The Radio Configurator contextual area shows the Radio Link(s) defined for the equipment.
Create a Radio Link
WARNING Operation not available if all the Radio ports have been already used for other Links.
If you wish to configure the equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration
- 2x(1+0) E-W - it is necessary to create two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0.
If you wish to configure the equipment with two Radio Links connected to the same site - 2x(1+0) - you
have to create two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 and, then, aggregate them.
After the creation of one Radio Link Radio in configuration 2+0 XPIC, it is necessary to aggregate the rel-
evant Radio ports.
2. Select Create New Link and press Next>.
3. Set, in the Select Link Type box, the Radio Link type you want to create:
1+0. Radio Link in unprotected configuration.
1+1 HS. Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
1+1 FD. Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
2x0 XPIC. Radio Link realized with two isofrequential transceivers which transmit on orthogonal
polarizations at the same time.
The available values change according to the equipment type (see Tab.4).
4. Set, in the Link Name box, the name of the Link (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum
32 characters).
By default, the name Link <progressive numeric value> is suggested.

5. In the table Available ODU, select the wished ODUs according to the set type of Radio Link. In detail,
for the Radio Link in configuration:
1+0, select ODU A or ODU B (if available).
1+1 HS, 1+1 FD or 2x0 XPIC, select ODU A and ODU B.
In any moment, it is possible to come back to step 2 pressing <Prev.
6. Press Done.
The Radio Link is created and displayed in the table Current Radio Configuration.
If at least one parameter has not been properly set, the button Done is not available.
Modify a Radio Link
WARNING Operation available if at least one Radio Link is defined.

If the equipment is configured with two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 (radio configuration
2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W) - the Radio Links cannot be modified. If you wish to modify the radio configura-
tion of a Link, it is necessary to remove one Radio Link and then modify the second Link.
2. Select Modify a Link and press Next>.
3. Set, in the Current Link box the Radio Link you want to modify.
4. Set, in the New Link Type box, the new type of the Radio Link.
Depending on the configuration of the Radio Link selected in the previous step, different values will be
available as indicated here below.
Current Link New Link Type
1+0 1+1 HS, 1+1 FD, 2+0 XPIC
1+1 HS 1+0, 1+1 FD
1+1 FD 1+0, 1+1 HS
2x0 XPIC 1+0
The wording No Configurations means that the Radio Link type cannot be changed.
5. In the table Available ODU, select the wished ODUs depending on the new type of Radio Link:
1+0, select ODU A or ODU B (if available).
1+1 HS, 1+1 FD or 2x0 XPIC, select ODU A and ODU B.
In any moment, you can go back to step 2 pressing <Prev.
6. Press Done.
The Radio Link is changed and displayed in the table Current Radio Configuration.
If at least one parameter has not been properly set, the button Done is not available.
Delete a Radio Link
WARNING Operation available if at least one Radio Link is defined.
2. Select Delete a Link and press Next>.
3. Select ( ), in the Select Link to Delete table, the Radio Link you want to delete.
4. Press Done.

The Radio Link is removed from the table Current Radio Configuration.
Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link
WARNING Operation meaningful only for Radio Links in configuration 2+0 XPIC or 2x(1+0).
In these configurations, the ports of the Radio Link have to be aggregated in such a way to compose a
single Bundle routed into the same direction.
2. Select Manage Aggregation and press Next>.

For each radio branch (column Aggregated - values ODU A, ODU B) the Radio port currently associated
to the radio channel is indicated (column Current Aggregator - values Port ODU A, Port ODU B).
The column New Aggregator indicates if a new aggregation can be done. The option:
No Aggregators Available, indicates that no aggregation can be done to the considered port.
Select New Aggregator, indicates that it is possible to do aggregation to the considered port.
3. Select the box with the value Select New Aggregator and choose the port you wish to aggregate.
4. Press Done.
In the table Current Radio Configuration, the column ODU Ports indicates the port where the Radio Bun-
dle terminates.
The aggregation between ports will be automatically removed by the system if the Radio Link is mod-
ified or deleted. In any moment the operator can remove the aggregation executing again this proce-
dure and selecting, in step 3, the port associated to the ODU (Aggregated: ODU B -> New Aggregator:
Port ODU B).

WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).
The contextual area shows the radio configuration present on the equipment.
Parameters
CURRENT RADIO CONFIGURATION
Link#. Number of the Radio Link.
Link Name. Name of the Radio Link.
Link Type. Type of the Radio Link:
1+0. Radio Link in unprotected configuration.
1+1 HS. Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
1+1 FD. Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
2x0 XPIC. Radio Link realized by two isofrequential transceivers which trans-
mit on orthogonal polarization at the same time.
ODU(s). Outdoor units on the equipment: ODU A, ODU B.
ODU Ports. Radio port which every single ODU is connected to.
If two ODUs are connected to the same Radio Port, it means that the Radio channels are
aggregated into a Radio Bundle.
Select Operation. Operations for the management of the Radio Links:
Create New Link. Create a Radio Link
Modify a Link. Modify a Radio Link
Delete a Link. Delete a Radio Link
Manage Aggregation. Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link
An option in grey is not available in the specific context.
Push-button
Prev. During an operation, it allows going back to the previous step.
Next. During an operation, it allows going to the next step.
See also
Radio Configurator (command)
Radio Link (info)

Radio Link (info)
AGS-20 equipment manages different types of Radio Links.

With Radio Link we mean a connection between one or more ports (IF) of the indoor unit (AGS-20) and
one or more outdoor units (ODU) which are considered one or more integral parts of AGS-20 network
equipment.
A Radio Link can have different configurations: 1+0, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 2+0 XPIC.
Two Radio Links in configuration 1+0 can be oriented to two different sites (configuration 2x(1+0) E-W)
or to a single site (configuration 2x(1+0). In the latter case, the Ethernet traffic of the two Radio Links has
to be necessarily aggregated.
Even in case of configuration 2+0 XPIC, the Ethernet traffic has to be necessarily aggregated.
In all the configurations, the ODUs are always connected to the IDUs through a dedicated channel avail-
able via IF cables.
The management programs access to the ODUs only through the IDU controller, this means that IDU and
ODU are always seen as a single network element.
The creation of the Radio Link must be executed by the operator via WEB LCT (see Create a Radio Link).
Once created, a Radio Link can be changed or deleted (see Modify a Radio Link and Delete a Radio Link).
Tab.4 shows, for each configuration of the Radio Link (native or system), the types of AGS-20 for which it
is available.
1+0
The Radio Link in configuration 1+0 uses a single ODU.
In this configuration, the radio offers no protection against the hardware failures.
1+1 HSB - 1+1 FD

The Radio Link in configuration 1+1 uses two ODUs.
In this configuration, the radio module offers protection against the hardware failures.
The protection logic supports two protection architectures:
Frequency Diversity (FD). Two parallel Tx-Rx connections using two different fre-
quencies. Both Tx branches are working; in Rx the best of the received signals is
used.
Hot Stand-By (HB). Two parallel Tx-Rx connections. One Tx is operating while the
second Tx is "mute"; in Rx the best of the received signals is used.
2x(1+0)
The equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) uses two ODUs connected to the same site.
In this configuration, two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 have to be defined, which
use two different frequencies.
The two Radio Links have to be necessarily aggregated by means of the functionality Physical
Layer Aggregation in such a way to create a single Bundle routed into the same direction (see
Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link).
The radio parameters can be independent and the TDM traffic can be managed separately on
both the radio links.
2x(1+0) E-W
The equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) E-W uses two ODUs connected with two different
sites.
In this configuration, two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 must be defined.
The radio signal is forwarded in two different directions named, by convention, East and West.
The radio parameters (modulation, bandwidth, channel frequency) are completely independent
and the traffic (TDM and Ethernet) is managed separately on both the radio links.

2+0 XPIC
The Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC uses two ODUs connected to the same site which
transmit on two polarizations of one antenna using the same frequency (functionality XPIC -
Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation).
In this configuration, one Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC.
The two ODUs have to be necessarily aggregated by means of the functionality Physical Layer
Aggregation in such a way to create a single Bundle routed into the same direction (see Aggre-
gate the Radio ports of a Link).
Tab.4 Radio Link Configuration
Radio configuration
Radio Outdoor
Equipment type * 2x(1+0) 2x(1+0) 2+0
module unit 1+0 1+1 HS 1+1 FD
** E-W *** XPIC
AGS-20 Switch - - - - - - - -
AGS-20 Single-IF x ODU A x - - - - -
AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1 x ODU A x - - - - -
AGS-20 Dual-IF ODU A

x x x x x x x
ODU B
AGS-20 Dual-IF 16xE1 ODU A
x x x x x x x
ODU B
* See Verify the equipment units

** See Create a Radio Link. The configuration must be realized creating two different Radio Links in
configuration 1+0 and then aggregating their Radio ports.
*** See Create a Radio Link. The configuration must be realized creating two different Radio Links in
configuration 1+0.
x Option available.
- Option not available.
See also
Radio Configurator (command)

BW & Mod./Link ID
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the BW & Mod./
Link ID command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more BW
& Mod./Link ID <Radio Link name> commands, one per every single Radio Link.
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and Link identification number.
Operations
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band
Modify the reference modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Verify/modify the number of E1s permanently allocated
Verify/modify the Link identification number
GUI
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.

The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

The Bandwidth parameter indicates the current reference band.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Features tab).


The Reference Modulation parameter indicates the current reference modulation.

The availability of values is shown in Tab.5.

The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
Tab.5 Availability modulations
Channel spacing
Modulations
Radio Link configuration: 1+0, 1+1 FD, 1+1 HS
4 QAM X X X X X
16 QAM X X X X X
32 QAM X X X X X
64 QAM X X X X X
128 QAM X X X X X
256 QAM X X X X X
512 QAM X X X X X
1024 QAM X X X X X
2048 QAM - X X X X
Radio Link configuration: 2+0 XPIC
4 QAM strong - X X X X
4 QAM - X X X X
16 QAM - X X X X
32 QAM - X X X X
64 QAM - X X X X
128 QAM - X X X X
256 QAM - X X X X
512 QAM - X X X X
1024 QAM - X X X X
2048 QAM - - - - -
X Supported value.
- Not supported value.


The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.
Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The parameter Profile Management indicates the type of management used by the adaptive modulation
for the profiles. The selection of the value influences the set of values which can be set for the modu-
lation thresholds (see Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation).

High Gain. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high system gain.
The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong to 256QAM, 512QAM Strong and 1024QAM
Strong.
High Throughput. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high throughput.
The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong a 256QAM, 512QAM, 1024QAM and 2048QAM.

The Upper Profile and Lower Profile parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and the lower
threshold of the ACM profile (code and modulation).
2. To change the parameters Upper Profile and Lower Profile, select the value relevant to the wished mod-
ulation.
WARNING The value changes according to the setting of the Profile Management parameter and of the
radio configuration (see Tab.5).
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
If equipment reached by supervision by radio connection (management) are present in the net-
work, it is necessary to execute the operation of E1 change first on the from remote equipment

furthest from management (last element), then on the second to last, on the third to last and
so on, until the equipment directly connected to management.
This procedure is necessary not to loose the traffic.

The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority
streams).
For the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, there are two parameters: one for the E1 channels of
ODU A (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU A]) and the other for the E1 channels of ODU B (Permanent TDM
Traffic [ODU B]).
2. To modify the parameter, type a new value.

The number of E1 changes in base to the set channelling and the modulations. Next to the box, the
maximum number of E1s which can be set is indicated time by time (Max. ...xE1).
The value 0 indicates that there are not high priority E1 channels set.

2. Select the Local Link ID tab.
The Local Link ID parameter indicates the Link identification number.
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (value between 1 and 255).
Set the value 0 to not use the Link identifier.

The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least
one Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration, the BW & Mod./Link ID
command is available which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area. For the equipment in 2x(1+0)
or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more BW & Mod./Link ID <Radio Link name> com-
mands. Every command opens a context area BW & Mod./Link ID <Radio Link name> containing the pa-
rameters relevant to the specific Radio Link.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and
Link identification number.
Tabs
Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.
Push-button
See also
BW & Mod./Link ID (command)
Modulation & Capacity tab
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation.
Parameters
BANDWIDTH & MODULATION
Bandwidth. Radio channelling.
Reference Modulation. Modulation.
The availability of values is shown in Tab.5.
PERMANENT TDM
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams).
These streams cannot be discarded by the adaptive modulation.
For the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC there are two parameter: one for the E1
channels of ODU A (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU A]) and the other for the E1 chan-
nels of ODU B (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU B]).
The maximum number of E1 which can be assigned permanently is indicated next to the
box(es).
Parameter(s) available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
ACM ENGINE CONFIGURATION

ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:
Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
Profile Management. Management of profiles for the adaptive modulation:
High Gain. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high system gain. The
available modulations are from 4QAM Strong to 256QAM, 512QAM Strong and
1024QAM Strong.

High Throughput. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high throughput.
The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong a 256QAM, 512QAM,
1024QAM and 2048QAM.
Lower Profile / Upper Profile. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the ACM
profile (code and modulation).
The value changes according to the setting of the Profile Management parameter and of
the radio configuration (see Tab.5).
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
ACM TABLE
This table shows, for each ACM level, the capacity used by Ethernet and TDM tributaries.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will
be available. If the adaptive modulation is:
Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference
modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).
Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile in-
cluded between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
For each ACM profile is pointed out:
Active Modulation (ACM Table). Availability modulations.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries.
Max. TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Maximum number of E1s (high priority) which
can be assigned to TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity + TDM Capacity* + Maintenance Chan-
nel.
* Value available only for equipment with TDM module.
WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (push-
button Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
See also
Local Link ID tab
The tab displays the Link identification number.
Parameters
Local Link ID. Link identification number.
Set the value 0 to not use the Link identifier.
See also

General Preset
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the General Preset
command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more General Pre-
set <Radio Link name> commands, one per every single Radio Link.
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Operations
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio Link label
GUI
General Preset contextual area
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.

The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.

The Link Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio Link.
2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).
The operation changes also the Link Name value present in the Radio Configurator contextual area.

General Preset contextual area
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration, the General Preset command
is available which opens the General Preset contextual area. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-
W configuration there are more General Preset <Radio Link name> commands. Every command opens
a context area General Preset <Radio Link name> containing the parameters relevant to the specific Radio
Link.
The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.
Parameters
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at recep-
tion.
Link Label. Label that identifies the radio Link.
Push-button
See also
General Preset (command)

Xpic
WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in
2+0 XPIC configuration.
The Xpic command manages the XPIC function.
Operations
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU
Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
GUI
Xpic contextual area
See also
XPIC function (info)
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
1. Select Equipment > Xpic.

The Xpic contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
User Profile |Read/Write, Admin.
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
2. To disable temporarily the function XPIC of:

ODU A, select the Disable value (ODU A parameter).
ODU B, select the Disable value (ODU B parameter).
3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

2. To restore the XPIC function of the:
ODU A, select the Enable value (ODU A parameter).
ODU B, select the Enable value (ODU B parameter).
2. To ENABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the Enable value (Status parameter).
To DISABLE the procedure, select the Disable value (Status parameter).
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
2. Press Reset Procedure and confirm.

WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link
in 2+0 XPIC configuration.
The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
Parameters
XPIC
ODU A. Activation of XPIC function for ODU A:
Enable. Function active.
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).
ODU B. Activation of XPIC function for ODU B:
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).
FAULT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE
Status. Status of XPIC fault management procedure (FMP):
Disable. FMP procedure is inactive.
Enable. FMP procedure is active.
When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on an ODU and
the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other ODU
are pointed out by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area. If a box
becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the rele-
vant to the relevant alarm), the box:
ODU A FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request, indicates that, after the de-
tection of a fault on one of the ODUs belonging to Link A, the FMP procedure has
switched off the ODU A from the local terminal.
ODU A FMP: Xpic Disable, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one
of the ODUs belonging to Link A, the FMP procedure has forced the disabling of
the XPIC function of the ODU A from the local terminal.
ODU B FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request, indicates that, after the de-
tection of a fault on one of the ODUs belonging to Link B, the FMP procedure has
switched off the ODU B from the local terminal.
ODU B FMP: Xpic Disable, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one of
the ODUs belonging to Link B, the FMP procedure has forced the disabling of the
XPIC function of the ODU B from the local terminal.
When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected.
Push-button
Reset Procedure. Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
See also
Xpic (command)

XPIC function
The function XPIC (Crosspolar Interference Canceller) is a modem functionality which allows us-
ing the double polarization (vertical and horizontal) in the transmission system.
In this way, exploiting two polarizations, the transmission capacity of the Radio Link can be dou-
ble using a single frequency.
WEB LCT
In relation to XPIC function, through GUI it is possible:
To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single ODU (Disable temporarily
the function XPIC for a single ODU) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC func-
tion of the single ODU).
Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the
timeout of the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until
when it is restored by the user.
To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable
XPIC fault management procedure (FMP).
In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection).
FMP procedure
Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused
by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch
where there are not problems
The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to
equipment faults.
The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of
the Xpic inputs.
The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX can restore the normal operating condition.
See also
Xpic (command)

BASE BAND
Ethernet. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration: port physical Layer, layer 2 forwarding,
VLAN settings, LLF, STP/RSTP, interface statistics.
DCN (LAN 3). It manages the configuration of equipment management parameters: IP addressing and
Routing Table.
TDM Tributaries. It manages the TDM tributaries.
Cross Connection. It manages the cross-connection matrix (TDM).

Ethernet
Bridge Mode Conf.. It manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch.
Port Manager. It manages the ports configuration of the Switch.
VLAN. It manages the virtual LAN (VLAN) configuration.
Prov. Bridge-VLAN. It manages the parameters relevant to VLANs when the Switch is in Provider Edge
Bridge modality.
Prov. Bridge-EtherType. It manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports.
Header Compression. It manages the compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets of streams
on the ports of a Radio Link.
RSTP. It manages the Spanning Tree Protocol.
LLF. It configures the operation of LLF functionality for the equipment.
Queue Depth. It manages the depth of the output queues.
Statistics. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/
bytes in input/output. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC
1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

Bridge Mode Conf.
The Bridge Mode Conf. command manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet
Switch.
Operations
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch
GUI
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf.

The Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area displays the current Bridge mode the Switch.
WARNING The operation involves the equipment restart.

Before performing the operation, it is necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol, if in use (see RSTP).
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf.
2. In the Bridge Mode box, select the option:

Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Customer Bridge
is supported.
This mode is supported for compatibility with the networks that do not manage the Service Tag
(S_Tag). Moreover, in this mode, the transport on the Radio Link is more efficient, because a
double Tag is not added.
Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single S-VLAN
component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q). The ports of type
Provider Network is supported.
Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN component
and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Network, Customer Network
and Customer Edge are supported.
In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to describe
the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2 and MEF 6.1).

Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area
The contextual area displays the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch.
Parameters
Bridge Mode. Operating modality of the Ethernet Switch:
Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Cus-
tomer Bridge is supported.
Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single
S-VLAN component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q).
The ports of type Provider Network and is supported.
Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN
component and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Net-
work, Customer Network and Customer Edge are supported.
In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to
describe the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2
and MEF 6.1).
Push-button
See also
Bridge Mode Conf. (command)

Port Manager
The Port Manager command manages the configuration of the Switch ports.
Operations
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration
Modify the type of interface
Modify the enabling status of a port
Activate the loop on line side of a port
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port
Modify the transmission speed of a port
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port
Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on
its priority (User Priority)
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management
GUI
Port Manager contextual area
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

The Port Manager contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet ports.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only for LAN 1 and LAN 2.
This operation involves the re-configuration of the port parameters Auto Neg. and MTU to the default value.
2. In the Media box relevant LAN 1 or LAN 2, select the option:

Combo (Copper). Ethernet port with electrical interface.
Combo (Fiber). Ethernet port with optical interface.

2. In the Admin State box, select the option:

Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.
Enabled. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status -
Down).

Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the
timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of
the equipment or the equipment reset.
Operation available only if the port is enabled to use (Admin State - Enabled).
2. Set the Loopback value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port.
2. Set the Enabled or Disabled value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port.
WARNING Operation meaningful only for the line ports of the Switch.
Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works correctly if the two peers have set the same modality for
the autonegotiation management.
2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, set the box:
Active ( ). The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the
peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonego-
tiation, the Full Duplex without flow control is proposed by default.
The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb.
Inactive ( ). The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured
in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of a port), the flow control configured in
the Data Flow tab, while the operation modality is Full Duplex.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port
WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. - ).
2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, press Restart and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only for the line ports with electrical interface and autonegotiation disabled
(Auto Neg. - ).
The transmission speed of the data through the port with optical interface is always 1 Gbit/s.
If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after
the negotiation with the peer at the other end of the connection.
2. In the Speed box relevant the wished port, select the option:
100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.
10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.
1 Gb. The data transmission speed through the port is 1 Gbit/s.
WARNING Operation available only for line ports with electrical interface and disabled (Admin State - Dis-
abled).
2. In the MDI/MDIX box relevant the wished port, select the option:
MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
WARNING Operation available only for the disabled ports (Admin State - Disabled).

2. In the MTU box relevant the wished port, set a number between 46 and 12266.
The value must correspond to the maximum dimension (in byte) of the data field accepted by the in-
terface without the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC.
WARNING Operation available only if the current Bridge modality of the Switch is Provider Edge Bridge (see
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area).
In Customer Bridge modality the port is always of type Customer Bridge, while in Provider Bridge (802.1ad)
modality the port is of type Provider Network (see Physical Interface tab).
For the line Ethernet ports, this operation involves the re-configuration of the following port parameters to
the default values: Auto Neg., MTU and Ingress Filtering.
2. In the Bridge Port Type box relevant the wished port, select the option:
Provider Network. Port where S-TAGs (NNI) are observed and managed if the equipment im-
plements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More C-TAGs can be present within one
S-TAG.
Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user, in
case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG received on this port are routed on a
single S-VLAN.
If this type of port is selected, the relevant parameter Acceptable Frame Type must be set to
value UnTagged and Priority Tagged (see Port Settings tab).
Customer Edge - (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user already
associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.
Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports
2. Select the Optical tab.

The tab displays the configuration of the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical in-
terface available on the equipment.
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports
WARNING In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for
the port to the Radio it is assigned by default.
The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the com-
mand PAUSE.
2. Select the Data Flow tab.

The tab displays the configuration of the flow control.

Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending
on its priority (User Priority)
2. Select Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab.

The tab contains a table which indicates, for each port, the traffic classes which a packet in input is
assigned to depending on its priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (field User Priority).
3. To change the association priority-traffic class relevant to the packets in input from a port, execute one
of the following actions:
Double click on the port.
Select the row relevant to the port and press Show.
The Traffic Class Mapping window shows a table which indicates the traffic class (columns Classes)
which the priority 802.1p (rows Priority) is assigned to, for the packets in input to the selected port.
4. In the table, select the option corresponding to the wished combination: priority value - traffic class.
For the same priority value, only one class can be selected.
The values of the traffic class range from 0 to 7. Every single value represents a type of traffic:
0 - Best effort. Traffic not sensitive to QoS metric.
1 - Background. Traffic not interfering with the use of the network by users and applications.
2 - Standard (spare traffic). Traffic more important than that of Background type, but less im-
portant than the Excellent Load type.
3 - Excellent load. Traffic representing the best service offered to the most important customers.
4 - Controlled load. Traffic which must be received even when the network is overloaded.
5 - Video. Traffic with delay lower than 100 milliseconds (video traffic).
6 - Voice. Traffic with delay lower than 10 milliseconds (voice traffic).
7 - Network control. Traffic reserved to the network control.
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management

The Tunneling tab shows the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is
the modality for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.

Port Manager contextual area
WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF
services have been activated. The change of the forwarding parameters or of the port type by WEB LCT
could prevent its operation.
The contextual area displays the configuration of the Switch ports.
Tabs
Physical Interface tab. General configuration of the ports.
Optical tab. Displays the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical interface
available on the equipment.
Data Flow tab. Configuration of the flow control.
Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab. Mapping between priority of the packets in input to the Switch
and the traffic classes.
Tunneling tab. Configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management.
Push-button
See also
Port Manager (command)
Physical Interface tab
The tab displays the general configuration of the ports.
Table
Every table row corresponds to a port for which are indicated:
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number
(slot number/port number).
Description. Name of the port:
LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electric).
LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).
LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).
ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.
ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B.
Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).
LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).
LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).
Media. Type of interface:
Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.
Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.
---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).
Combo (...). Ethernet port with interface programmable by the user: electrical
or optical. The type of set interface is indicated in brackets:
(Copper): electrical interface.

(Fiber): optical interface.
Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the port and a device in network:
Up. The Link works: the physical connection is active and ready for the traffic
exchange.
Down. The Link does not work: no physical connection has been enabled or
the established physical connection is not active or is defective.
Admin State. Enabling state/loop of the port:
Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive
traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not
work.
LoopBack. The line side loop is enabled for the port.
Value available only if the port is in Enabled status.
Default Disabled.
Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the port. The box:
Active ( ) indicates that the autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates
the transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to
find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex mo-
dality without flow control is proposed.
The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb.
In this condition, next to the box the button Restart is displayed: press it to
restart the autonegotiation procedure for the port.
Inactive ( ), indicates that the autonegotiation is not enabled. The port uses
the transmission speed configured in the Speed box (see Modify the transmis-
sion speed of a port), the flow control configured in the Data Flow tab, while
the operation modality is Full Duplex.
---, indicates that the parameter is not meaningful for the port (e.g. Radio
port).
Duplex. Transmission modality of the port:
Full. The transmission modality is Full-Duplex.
Half. The transmission modality is Half-Duplex.
Speed. Data transmission speed through the port: 10 Mb, 100 Mb, etc.
MDI/MDIX. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:
MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card
modality).
MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).
Parameter meaningful only for ports with electrical interface.
MTU. Maximum dimension, in byte, of the packet accepted by the port.
The displayed value is the maximum value of the data field accepted by the interface
without the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC.
Bridge Port Type. Type of Bridge port:
Customer Bridge. Port where C-TAGs (UNI), are observed and managed if the
equipment implements a Customer Bridge.
Option available only when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.
Provider Network. Port where S-TAGs (NNI) are observed and managed if the
equipment implements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More C-
TAGs can be present within one S-TAG.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Bridge (802.1ad) modality
o Provider Edge Bridge modality.
Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of
a single user, in case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG re-
ceived on this port are routed on a single S-VLAN.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

Customer Edge (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a sin-
gle user already associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.
Push-button
Restart. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port.
See also
Optical tab
The tab displays the data of the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) optical module relevant to the Ethernet
ports with optical interface available on the equipment.
All parameter are read only.
Table
LAN 1. First line Ethernet port.
LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port.
LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port.
LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port.
LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port.
LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port.
Fail Alarm. Status of the alarm which indicates the malfunctioning of the optical module
(Plug-in module Fail Alarm). The colour of the box displays the status of the alarm:
Vendor Name. Name of the optical module.
Vendor PN. Part number of the optical module.
Vendor SN. Serial number of the optical module.
Vendor Date. Manufacturing date of the optical module.
Wave Length (nm). Wave length (in nanometres) of the optical module.

Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps)). Nominal data transmission speed in Mbit/sec.
Link Length 9um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 9/125 m fiber supported
by the optical module.
Link Length 50um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 50/125 m fiber support-
ed by the optical module.
Link Length 62.5um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 62.5/125 m fiber sup-
ported by the optical module.
Data Flow tab
The tab displays the configuration of the flow control.

In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for the port to
the Radio it is assigned by default.
The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the com-
mand PAUSE.
All parameters in the tab are read only.
Table
LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).
Flow Control Admin Status. Management of the flow control assigned by default for
the specific port:
Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the trans-
port of the command PAUSE is disabled.
Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the
command PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal con-
gestion due to excess of received traffic.
Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the
transport of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data trans-
mission if required by an external equipment.
Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of
the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.
Flow Control Oper Status. It displays the management modality of the flow control
currently used by the specific port:
Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the trans-
port of the command PAUSE is disabled.
Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the
command PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal con-
gestion due to excess of received traffic.
Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the
transport of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data trans-
mission if required by an external equipment.
Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of
the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.

Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab
The tab shows the mapping between the priority 802.1p within the Tag VLan (field User Priority) of the
packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes managed by the equipment.
The packet received on a port with a specific priority will be forwarded according to the relevant traffic
class. For the packets without Tag, the priority is equivalent to the value of Default User Priority of the port
in input (see Port Settings tab).
Table
Priority 0. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet
with User Priority value equal to 0 is assigned to.
Push-button
Show. Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, de-
pending on its priority (User Priority)
Tunneling tab
WARNING L2CP tunneling cannot be partially overlapped: all needed tunnelings must be enabled at the
same port. In case of:
Cascaded Links without traffic dropping, tunneling can be enabled at the first and the last port.
Cascaded Links with traffic dropping, tunnellings must be enabled on all intermediate ports.
The tab displays the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is the modality
for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.

Parameters
MAC ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
BPDU Priority. Predefined priority for all the BPDU packets encapsulated at level 2 and
received on the tunnel ports: 0 7.
Default 7.
STP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of BPDU STP packets.
LACP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of LACP packets.
Dot1x. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of Dot1x packets.
GVRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GVRP packets.
GMRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GMRP packets.
TUNNEL STATUS
The list contains the ports of Customer Network (port-based) or Customer Edge type.
Dot1x. State of the Tunneling for Dot1x protocol:
Peer. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received Dot1x packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PBs and
PEBs.
Discard. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
LACP. State of the Tunneling for LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) protocol:
Peer. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received LACP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the
Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PBs and PEBs.
Discard. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
STP. State of the Tunneling for STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) protocol:
Peer. The STP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received STP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the
Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PBs and PEBs.
Discard. The STP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
GVRP. State of the Tunneling for GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) protocol:
Peer. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received GVRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
PEBs.
Discard. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
GMRP. State of the Tunneling for GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) protocol:
Peer. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received GMRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
PEBs.
Discard. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
IGMP. State of the Tunneling for IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) protocol:
Peer. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
Tunnel. The received IGMP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
PEBs.
Discard. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

VLAN
WARNING In AGS-20 equipment, VLANs work in the Switch in VLAN Aware Bridging modality.
In this modality, the bridge identify the packets with TAG VLAN and can insert and remove TAGs in the
packet heading.
The Switch operates in compliance with Standard IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad.
The command VLAN manages the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the
virtual LANs (VLAN).
Operations
BASIC SETTINGS
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch
PORT SETTINGS
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID)
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority
802.1p received on the port
STATIC VLANS
Verify the existing static VLANs
Create one or more static VLANs
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN
Delete one or more static VLANs
GUI
VLAN contextual area
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

The Basic Settings tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management.
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Switch is available only if enabled this function.
The setting is common for all port of the Switch.
2. In the Global MAC Learning Status box, select the option:

Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.
Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In this condition MAC
Table is not used.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table (Global MAC Learn-
ing Status - Enable) is enabled.
2. In the MAC Addr Table Aging Time box, set the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically ac-
quired and stored in the specific table (number between 10 and 1000000 seconds).
Default 300 seconds.
2. Set, in the box Unicast MAC Learning Limit, the limit of MAC Unicast addresses per VLAN managed by
the Switch (number between 0 and 16000).
The limit represents the maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses which can be learned by
the Switch.
WARNING Operation not available for the ports of type Customer Network (port-based) or Customer Edge
(see Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab), which have always the value UnTagged and Priority Tagged.
2. Select the Port Settings tab.
3. In the Acceptable Frame Types box relevant the wished port, select the option:
All. The port accepts all the following packets:
Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and
one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid by the port.
Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port
and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets
are rejected.
UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets.
The Tagged packets are rejected.

3. In the Ingress Filtering box relevant the wished port, select the option:
Enabled. The port accepts, in input, only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU and the input
port must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
Disabled. The port does not execute any check: all the packets are accepted.
WARNING The default VLAN identifier of a port is used to assign a VLAN to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged
packets received on the port itself. The parameter is used for the classification of the VLANs on port basis
(Port-Based VLAN classification).

3. In the PVID box relevant the wished port, set a value between 1 and 4094.
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p
received on the port

3. In the Default User Priority box relevant the wished port, set a value between 0 (lowest priority) and 7
(highest priority).
Verify the existing static VLANs
2. Select the Static VLANs tab.

The tab displays the existing static virtual LANs.

Create one or more static VLANs
3. Press Add.
4. If you wish to create:

More VLANs at the same time, expand the area Group Add.
Set, in the box VLAN ID Start, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) of the first VLAN of the range.
Set, in the box VLAN ID Stop, the identifier of the last VLAN of the range.
The value of VLAN ID Stop must be greater than the value of VLAN ID Start and no VLAN with
identifier between Start and Stop values must not be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLANs (and inserts the corresponding rows in the table) equal
to the difference between the values of the parameters VLAN ID Stop and VLAN ID Start, with
progressive identifiers from the lowest value to the highest value, and automatically assigns the
corresponding VLAN Name using the format <Label> <identifier>.
All the VLANs created automatically assume the same enabling policy for the transit of packets
through the ports of the Switch.
The system guarantees the contemporary creation of maximum 100 VLANs.
A single VLAN, set, in the box VLAN ID, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) you wish to assign
to the virtual LAN.
An identifier greater then that indicated in the field Max. VLAN ID cannot be used.
Set, in the box VLAN Name, the name (alphanumeric string, 32 characters at most) you wish to
assign to the VLAN.
The system automatically suggests, as VLAN name, VLAN <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.
5. Activate ( ), in the box Member Ports, the ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal
to the VLANs one.
For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (LAN1, LAN
2, etc.) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider Network, etc.) (see Bridge Port Type,
Physical Interface tab).
At least one port must be activated to create a VLAN.
6. Activate ( ), in the box Untagged Ports, the ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed
from.
For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (Mngt, LAN-
1, etc. - see Description, Physical Interface tab) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider
Network, etc. - see Bridge Port Type, Physical Interface tab).
7. Select, in the box Ether Type, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which the packets must have to be
identified as belonging to the VLAN:
0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.
0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.

The Static VLANs tab displays the row relevant to the new VLAN.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLAN you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLAN can be modified (VLAN Name, Member
Ports, Untagged Ports, Ether Type).

The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create one or more static VLANs.

The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.
Delete one or more static VLANs
3. Select the VLAN you wish to delete.

The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
The system guarantees the contemporary deletion of maximum 100 VLANs.
4. Press Remove and confirm.

VLAN contextual area
services have been activated. The change of parameters relevant to the VLAN management from WEB LCT
could preclude the operation of the VLANs themselves.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the vir-
tual LANs (VLAN).
Tabs
Basic Settings tab. Basic configuration of the VLAN management.
Port Settings tab. VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the
equipment.
Static VLANs tab. Configuration of the existing static VLANs.
Push-button
See also
VLAN (command)
Basic Settings tab
The tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management.
Parameters
LEARNING OPTIONS
Learning Mode. Learning mode for the addresses in the MAC Table.
The writing Independent VLAN Learning indicates that the partition and the indicization
on VID basis of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled. The learning registers
them in a MAC Table segment whose index is the value of the VID contained in the VLANs
in input to the Switch and registered in VTU.
In this modality, the information learned by a VLAN are not used by other VLANs for the
packet forwarding.
Parameter common to all port of the Switch.
Global MAC Learning Status. Enabling status of the learning of the addresses in the
MAC Table:
Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.
Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In
this condition MAC Table is not used.
Parameter common to all port of the Switch.
MAC Add. Table Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses stored in the MAC
Table (expressed in seconds).
Default 300 seconds.
Unicast MAC Learning Limit. Maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses per
VLAN which can be learned by the Switch.
VLAN STATUS
Max. VLAN ID. VLAN identifier accepted by the Switch as maximum value.
Max Supported VLAN. Maximum number of VLANs which can be managed by the
Switch.

Num of VLANs in the System. Total number of VLANs currently managed by the
equipment.
See also
Port Settings tab
The tab displays the VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the equip-
ment.
Table
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.
Selecting the heading of a column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric
order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed up-
wards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip
directed downwards) and so on.
For each port are indicated:
LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).
Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packets accepted
in input by the port and subjected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering):
Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by
the port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not val-
id by the port.
Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as
valid by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority
Tagged packets are rejected.
UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Prior-
ity Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.
Default All.
The parameter has always value UnTagged and Priority Tagged for the ports of type Cus-
tomer Network (port-based) and Customer Edge (see Bridge Port Type - Physical Inter-
face tab).
Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the
port:

Enabled. The port accepts in input only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU
and the port in input must be a member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is
discarded.
Disabled. The port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.
Default Disabled.
PVID. Default VLAN identifier assigned to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged packets re-
ceived on the port itself: 1 4094.
The parameter is used for the VLAN classification on port basis (Port-Based VLAN classi-
fication).
Default User Priority. Default value to insert in the field User Priority (priority 802.1p
within Tag VLan) of the packets without priority value received on the port: 0 (lowest
priority) 7 (highest priority).
See also
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p
received on the port
Static VLANs tab
The tab displays the configuration of the physical ports of the Switch.
The static VLANs are configured per port (Port-based VLAN) differently from the dynamic VLANs which
are configured according to MAC address or to protocol.
During the creation of a static VLAN, one port of the Switch is assigned to the specific VLAN, so that the
device connected to that port automatically becomes member of the assigned VLAN.
Table
Each row of the table corresponds to a VLAN for which are indicated:
VLAN ID. VLAN identifier.
Selecting the heading of this column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing nu-
meric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip
directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is dis-
played with the tip directed downwards) and so on.
VLAN Name. VLAN name.
Member Ports. Ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal to that of the
VLAN.
For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are
separated by comma.
Untagged Ports. Ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed from.
For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are
separated by comma.
Ether Type. Value of EtherType which the packets in input must have to be identified as
belonging to the VLAN:
0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications
Push-button
Add. Create one or more static VLANs
Remove. Delete one or more static VLANs
See also

Prov. Bridge-VLAN
WARNING Command available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.
All the parameters present in the tabs are read-only. They can be configured only via CLI.
The command Prov. Bridge-VLAN displays the parameters relevant to the VLANs when the Switch is in
Provider Edge Bridge modality.
Operations
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration)
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration)
GUI
Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration)
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN.

The C-VID Registration tab shows the C-VID registration table.
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration)
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN.

The PEP Configuration tab shows the Provider Edge Port configuration table.

Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area
services have been activated.
The contextual area shows the parameters relevant to the VLANs when the Switch is in Provider Edge
Bridge modality.
Tabs
C-VID Registration tab. C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration).
PEP Configuration tab. Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration).
Push-button
See also
Prov. Bridge-VLAN (command)
C-VID Registration tab
The tab displays the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration).
An internal connection between one Customer Network (CNP) port on S-VLAN component and one Provider
Edge (PEP) port on C-VLAN component is instanced for every VLAN.
The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (C-VID Reg-
istration) and PEP configuration table (see PEP Configuration tab).
In C-VID registration table, one entry is created for every C-VLAN supported in the C-VLAN component
associated with one Customer Edge port (CEP).
The CEP identifier and the C-VID combination identify one PEP. The entry contains (among the other pa-
rameters) a S-VID value corresponding to the PVID of CNP, which associates the PEP to a specific Customer
Network port (CNP).
Table
Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated:
The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type.
C-VLAN ID. Customer VLAN ID value present in the C-TAG of the packets in input to the
specific port: 1 4094.
S-VLAN ID. VLAN ID of the service instance which the port and the Customer VLAN ID
are mapped to: 1 4094.
Untagged PEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID, in inputs
to the Customer Edge port through the Provider Edge port:
TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.
FALSE. The packets are forwarded with a valid C-TAG and C-VID.
Untagged CEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID through the
Customer Edge port:
TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.
FALSE. The packets are forwarded with TAG C-VLAN. If this is missing, it is
added.
Push-button
Add. Push-button not available in this version.
Remove. Push-button not available in this version.

PEP Configuration tab
The tab displays the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration).
For every VLAN, one internal connection is instanced between one Customer Network port (CNP) on S-
VLAN component and one Provider Edge port (PEP) on C-VLAN component.
The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (see C-VID
Registration tab) and PEP configuration table.
In PEP configuration table, one entry is created for every S-VID corresponding to one service instance ac-
cessible by the C-VLAN component.
The Customer Edge Port (CEP) identifier and the S-VID combination identify one CNP. The entry contains
(among the other parameters) one C-VID value corresponding to the PVID of PEP, which associates the
CNP to a specific PEP.
Table
The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type.
S-VID. S-VLAN identifier: 1 4094.
P-VID. Default VLAN identifier assigned to the UnTagged packets received on the PEP
port: 1 4094.
Default User Priority. Default priority value (User Priority) assigned to the UnTagged
packets received on the PEP port: 0 (lowest priority) 7 (highest priority).
Default 0.
Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU packets accepted in input by the PEP port and
subjected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering):
Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by
the port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not val-
id by the port.
Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as
valid by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
Tagged Only. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and
Priority Tagged packets are rejected.
Untagged & Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority
Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.
Default Admit-All.
Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the PEP
port:
TRUE. The port drops the packets classified to the specific C-VLAN if the port
is not a member of the C-VLAN itself.
FALSE. The PEP port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.
Default FALSE.
COS Preservation. Enabling status, for the PEP port, of the function Class of Service
Preservation for a Service Provider:
Enable. Function CoS preservation enabled: the mapping between the priority
of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is preserved in the
Provider network.
Disabled. Function CoS preservation disabled: the mapping between the pri-
ority of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is not pre-
served in the Provider network.
Default Disabled.

Prov. Bridge-EtherType
WARNING Command available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge
Bridge modality.
The Prov. Bridge-EtherType command manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet
ports.
Operations
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports
GUI
Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType.

The Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area shows the EtherType values in the S-Tag (Service Tag)
field for every Ethernet port.
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports
WARNING Typical values of EtherType fields:

0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.
0x9100. Service VLAN Tag related to a not standard QinQ protocol.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType.

2. Set, in the field Ingress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must
have the packets in input to the Ethernet port.
For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports,
the default value is 0x88a8.
3. Set, in the field Egress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must
be applied to the packets in output from the Ethernet ports.
For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other
ports, the default value is 0x88a8.

Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge
Bridge modality.
The contextual area displays the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports.
Parameters
Read-only parameter.
Ingress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag of the packets in input to the
Ethernet port.
For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the
other ports, the default value is 0x88a8.
Egress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag applied to the packets in output
from the Ethernet ports.
For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For
all the other ports, the default value is 0x88a8.
Push-button
See also
Prov. Bridge-EtherType (command)

Header Compression
The command Header Compression allows managing the compression of the headers of the Ethernet
packets of streams on the ports of a Radio Link.
Operations
Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets
Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets
Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets
Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets
GUI
Header Compression contextual area
See also
Header Compression (info)
Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Header Compression.

The Header Compression contextual area shows the status of the functionality for the radio port on the
equipment.

The parameter H.C. Status indicates the enabling status functionality:
Enable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is enabled.
Disable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is disabled.
2. To change the enabling status of the functionality, select the wished value.

The parameter Context Depth indicates the total size of the fields of the header you wish to compress.
The number of available contexts (and then the number of streams which can be managed at the same
time on the same Radio Link) changes with inverse relation to the selected context depth:
16 bytes (up to 2048 contexts).

2. To change the context depth, select the wished value.

The parameter Parsing Mode indicates the modality used by the compressor to parse the header of the
Ethernet packets in output from the LAN to the radio port:
IPv4/IPv6 without C.W., EoMPLS with C.W.
EoMPLS without C.W.
Always IPv4/IPv6.
2. To change the parsing mode, select the wished value.

The contextual area displays the status of the Header Compression functionality for the Ethernet packets
in output from the LANs to the radio.
The lower part of the contextual area displays the protocols and the modes supported by the Parser of
Header Compression functionality.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one radio port for which are indicated:
Port. Identifier of the port.
H.C. Status. Enabling status of Header Compression functionality.
Enable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is enabled.
Disable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is disabled.
Context Depth. The context depth is in inverse relation to the number of contexts.
Parsing Mode. Modality used by the header of the Ethernet packets in output to the ra-
dio is examined for the compression:
IPv4/IPv6 without C.W., EoMPLS without C.W.
EoMPLS without C.W.
IPv4/IPv6 without C.W.
Push-button
See also
Header Compression (command)

Packets belonging to the same stream have a great part of their header (up to 90%) that does not change
in time (IP and MAC addresses, TAG Ethernet, MPLS labels, etc).
The Header Compression hop-by-hop functionality allows storing, at the ends of a Radio Link, all the infor-
mation which repeats identical packet after packet and transmitting only the variable fields (Sequence
Number, TimeStamp, etc).
This allows achieving good gains in terms of throughput in presence of long communication streams char-
acterized by a great number of packets (for example, real-time communication). In order to achieve this
result, it is necessary to support a lot of streams at the same time, so to maximise the gain.
The set of static information of the packets belonging to the same stream is stored by the compression/
decompression module and is defined context.
The compression function will operate in the direction from LAN to Radio, while the decompression function
will operate in the opposite direction.
See also
Header Compression (command)

RSTP
The command RSTP manages the Spanning Tree protocol.
Operations
Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment
OPERATIONS AT SWITCH LEVEL
Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function

Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function
Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function
Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP)
Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP)
Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP)
Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP)
Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP)
OPERATIONS AT ETHERNET PORT LEVEL
Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP)

Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port
Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP)
Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP)
GUI
RSTP contextual area
See also
STP/RSTP Protocol (info)
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP.
2. In the System Control box, set the Start value, press Apply and confirm.
This operation activates the STP/RSTP function on every port of the Switch: the memory necessary for
the operation is allocated.
3. Select the box Enable Ports, activate the ports you wish set for the RSTP function, press Apply and
confirm.
This operation creates an instance for every single port activated in the STP/RSTP table (see Port Set-
tings tab and Port Status tab).
4. In order to change the default values of the general parameters of the Switch, execute the following
procedures:
Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Dynamic Path
Cost Calculation - Default: Disable).
Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Version - Default: RSTP Com-
patible).
Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Priority - Default:
32768 (8).
Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP) (parameter:
Tx Hold Count - Default: 6).

Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) (parameters:
Max Age - Default: 20 seconds, Hello Time - Default: 2 seconds, Forward Delay - Default: 15
seconds).
5. Select Port Settings tab.
6. Verify that the parameter RSTP Status is set to Enable for all the ports. Otherwise, set the value Enable,
press Apply and confirm.
The ports in state Enable are enabled to the operation of STP/RSTP protocol: the ports take part to the
Spanning Tree process and are ready to transmit/receive BPDU packets.
7. In order to change the default values of the port parameters, execute the following procedures:
Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Port Priority - Default: 128 (8).
Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Path Cost - Default: 8000 for ODU
ports and line ports configured at 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s and 2000000
for 10Mb/s).
WARNING If, in this moment of the procedure, a software reset is performed (see Execute the equip-
ment software reset), the ports enabled to the use of STP/RSTP protocol (see step 6) are locked even
if the use of STP/RSTP protocol is not completely enabled.
In order to unlock them, it is necessary to disable the ports (set the parameter RSTP Status of every
port to Disable) and then re-enable them (setting the parameter RSTP Status of every port to Enable).
8. Select Settings tab.
9. Set the value Enabled in the box Status, press Apply and confirm.
This operation enables the use of the protocol STP or RSTP (depending on the selected version) for the
equipment: the ports begin transmitting/receiving BPDU packets.

The parameter System Control indicates the enabling state, by the control system, of the STP/RSTP
function for the Switch:
Start. The system activates the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the necessary memory
is allocated for the function.
Shutdown. The system stops the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the allocated memory
is de-allocated and made available for other activities.
2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value.

WARNING Selecting the value Shutdown involves the disabling and the loss of all the configurations
made by the user for the STP/RSTP function. In fact, when the value Start is selected later, all the pa-
rameters will be available set to their default value.
WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

The parameter Enable Ports indicates the setting of the STP/RSTP function for every Switch port. The
box:
Active ( ) indicates that the STP/RSTP function is set for the port (the port is inserted in the
STP/RSTP tables: Port Settings and Port Status).
Inactive ( ) indicates that the port is not set for the STP/RSTP function (the port is not present
in STP/RSTP tables).

The port identifier (slot number/port number) and the port name (LAN 1, LAN 2 etc.) is indicated for
every port.
2. To change the parameters, activate or deactivate the wished boxes.

The parameter Status indicates the enabling state of STP/RSTP function:
Enabled. Activates the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports transmit/receive the BPDU
packets.
Disabled. Disables the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports do not transmit/receive the
BPDU packets.
If the default value of a port is changed (see Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP)), this value
will be used as Path Cost independently from the state (Enable or Disable) of the parameter Dynamic Path
Cost Calculation.

The Dynamic Path Cost Calculation parameter indicates the state of the dynamic path cost calculation
function. The Path Cost represents the distance between the port Root and the port Designated. The
Path Cost, according to the Specification 802.1d, is calculated dividing the bit rate by the bandwidth of
the segment connected to the port:
Enable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the ports whose administrative
state is active (Enabled) in that moment. The path cost, once calculated, is not changed depend-
ing on the operating state of the ports.
Disable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the connection when the port is
created.
2. To change the parameters, select the wished options.

The Version parameter indicates the Spanning Tree protocol version currently used by the Switch.

STP Compatible. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

RSTP Compatible. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1D-2004. Protocol charac-
terized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

The Priority parameter indicates the priority assigned to the Switch. This value is used during the elec-
tion of the Root.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

Values between 0 (highest priority) and 61440 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided by intervals
of 4096: 0, 4096 (1), 8192 (2), 12288 (3), 16384 (4), 20480 (5) and so on up to 61440 (15).
2. The parameter Tx Hold Count indicates the maximum number of BPDU packets which can be transmit-
ted within a given interval.
The parameter is common for all the ports of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, select a value between 1 and 10.
The parameters are common for all the ports of the Switch.
The parameter setting must respect the formula 2 x (Forward Delay - 1) Max Age 2 x (Hello Time +1).

The parameter:
Max Age, indicates the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before
expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equip-
ment.
Hello Time, indicates the time interval between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU
(Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet, generated by the Switch.
Forward Delay, indicates the time interval which passes between the passage between the Dis-
carding status and the Learning status and between the Learning status and the Forwarding sta-
tus of the port.
2. To change the parameter in the box:

Max Age, select a value between 6 and 40 seconds.

Hello Time, select a value between 1 and 2 seconds.
Forward Delay, select a value between 4 and 30 seconds.

The parameter Port Priority indicates the priority of every single port.
This value is used during the process for the selection of the port role.
3. In order to change a parameter, select the box Port Priority relevant to the wished port and select a
value between 0 (highest priority) and 240 (lowest priority). Values are subdivided in intervals of 16:
0, 16 (1), 32 (2), 48 (3) and so on up to 240 (15).

The parameter RSTP Status indicates the enabling state for the operation of the STP/RSTP protocol of
every single port:
Disable. Protocol operation disabled: the port does not take part to the Spanning Tree process
and does not transmit/receive BPDU packets.
Enable. Protocol operation enabled: the port takes part to the Spanning Tree process and is
ready to transmit/receive BPDU packets.
3. In order to change a parameter, select the box RSTP Status relevant to the wished port and select the
wished option.
WARNING The default value of Path Cost for every single port is automatically set as function of the port
bit rate: 8000 for ODU ports and line ports configured to 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s
and 2000000 for 10Mb/s.
If the default value of the port cost is changed, this value will be used as Path Cost independently from the
state (Enable or Disable) of the parameter Dynamic Path Cost Calculation.

The Path Cost parameter indicates the cost of the network portion directly connected to every single
port.
3. In order to modify a parameter, select the box Path Cost relevant to the wished port and set a value
between 1 and 200 000 000.


The Port Status tab displays the information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP func-
tionality.

RSTP contextual area
The contextual area displays the parameters for management of Spanning Tree protocol.
Tabs
Settings tab. Parameters of the STP/RSTP module, used at global level by the Switch and by all
its ports.
Port Settings tab. Parameters of the Ethernet ports relevant to STP/RSTP function.
Port Status tab. Information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP functionality.
Push-button
See also
RSTP (command)
Settings tab
The tab displays the general basic parameters of the STP/RSTP module, used at global level by the Switch
and all its ports.
Parameters
GLOBAL CONFIGURATION
System Control. Enabling state, by the control system, of the STP/RSTP function for the
Switch:
Start. The system activates the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the
necessary memory is allocated for the function.
Shutdown. The system stops the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the
allocated memory is made available for other activities.
Default Shutdown.
Enable Ports. Setting of the STP/RSTP function for every Switch port.
The active box ( ) indicates that the STP/RSTP function is set for the port (the port is
inserted in the STP/RSTP tables: Port Settings and Port Status); the inactive box ( )
indicates that the STP/RSTP function is not set for the port (the port is not present in the
STP/RSTP tables).
The identifier of the port (slot number/port number) and the port name (LAN 1, LAN 2
etc.) is indicated for every port.
By default, all the ports are disabled.
Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.
Dynamic Path Cost Calculation. State of the path cost dynamic calculation function.
The Path Cost represents the distance between the port Root and the port Designated.
The Path Cost, according to the Specification 802.1d, is calculated dividing the bit rate
by the bandwidth of the network portion connected to the port:
Enable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the ports whose
administrative state is active (Enabled) in that moment. The path cost, once
calculated, is not changed according to the operating state of the ports.
Disable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the connection
when the port is created.
Default Disable.
Status. Enabling state of the STP/RSTP function:

Enabled. Activates the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports transmit/
receive the BPDU packets.
Disabled. Disables the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports do not
transmit/receive the BPDU packets.
Default Disabled.
Dynamic Path Cost Lag-Speed. Parameter not meaningful in the current system ver-
sion. For future use.
RSTP CONFIGURATION
Version. Spanning Tree protocol version currently used by the Switch:
STP Compatible. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
RSTP Compatible. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1D-2004.
Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
Default RSTP Compatible.
Priority. Priority assigned to the Switch. This value is used during the election of the
Root.
Values between 0 (highest priority) and 61440 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided
in intervals of 4096: 0, 4096 (1), 8192 (2), 12288 (3), 16384 (4), 20480 (5) and so on,
up to 61440 (15).
Default 32768 (8).
Tx Hold Count. Maximum number of BPDU packets which can be transmitted within a
given interval.
Default 6.
Max Age.Maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before ex-
piring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per
equipment.
Default 20 seconds.
Hello Time. Interval between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Proto-
col Data Unit) packet, generated by the Switch.
Default 2 seconds.
Forward Delay. Time interval which passes between the passage between the Discard-
ing status and the Learning status and between the Learning status and the Forwarding
status of the port.
Default 15 seconds.
See also

Port Settings tab
The tab displays the parameters of the Ethernet ports in relation to STP/RSTP function.
Table
Every table row corresponds to one port set for the STP/RSTP function (parameter Enable Ports,
box active).
The table will be empty if the parameter System Control has value Shutdown or if the parameter
Enable Ports has not active values (see Settings tab).
Port Role. Role assigned by STP/RSTP to the port. The role defines the behaviour of the
port according to the state of the Bridge in the network:
Disabled. Porta disabled manually (state STP/RSTP) or automatically (Link): it
will not take part to Spanning Tree process.
Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) to the Bridge elected Root. Eve-
ry Bridge can have only one Root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, every Root port is in state Forwarding.
Alternate. Port alternative to the Root port, as it offers an alternative path to
the Bridge Root with cost higher with respect to the Root port. Generally, the
Alternate port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Root if the Root
port is in state Discarding.
Designated. Port which does not offer paths to the Bridge Root and is used to
forward the information of the Bridge Root to other Bridges. Every Designated
port is in state Forwarding. In every segment, only one port is Designated.
Backup. Port physically connected to a Lan where a Designated port of the
same Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in state Discarding. It is enabled
and declared Designated if the current Designated port is in state Discarding.
Port Priority. This value is used during the process of selection of the port role (see Port
Role).
Values between 0 (highest priority) and 240 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided in
intervals of 16: 0, 16 (1), 32 (2), 48 (3), 64 (4), 80 (5) and so on up to 240 (15).
Default 128 (8).
RSTP Status. Port enabling state as regards the operation of STP/RSTP protocol:
Disable. Protocol operation disabled: the port does not take part to Spanning
Tree process and does not receive/transmit BPDU packets.
Enable. Protocol operation enabled: the port stake part to Spanning Tree pro-
cess and is ready to receive/transmit BPDU packets.
Default Enable.
Path Cost. Cost of the network segment directly connected to the port. It represents the
distance between the port Root and the port Designated.

The default value is automatically set depending on the port bit rate: 8000 for ODU ports
and line ports configured at 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s and
2000000 for 10Mb/s.
The selection of present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of a column in the table.
See also
Port Status tab
The tab displays the information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP functionality.
All the parameters are read-only.
Table
Every table row corresponds to one port set for the STP/RSTP function (parameter Enable Ports,
active box).
The table will be empty if the parameter System Control has value Shutdown or if the parameter
Enable Ports has not active values (see Settings tab).
Port Role. Role assigned by STP/RSTP to the port. The role defines the behaviour of the
port according to the state of the Bridge in the network:
Disabled. Porta disabled manually (state STP/RSTP) or automatically (Link): it
will not take part to Spanning Tree process.
Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) to the Bridge elected Root. Eve-
ry Bridge can have only one Root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, every Root port is in state Forwarding.
Alternate. Port alternative to the Root port, as it offers an alternative path to
the Bridge Root with cost higher with respect to the Root port. Generally, the
Alternate port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Root if the Root
port is in state Discarding.
Designated. Port which does not offer paths to the Bridge Root and is used to
forward the information of the Bridge Root to other Bridges. Every Designated
port is in state Forwarding. In every segment, only one port is Designated.
Backup. Port physically connected to a Lan where a Designated port of the
same Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in state Discarding. It is enabled
and declared Designated if the current Designated port is in state Discarding.

Port State. Current state of the port in relation to RSTP functionality.
Update the
Receive Forward Receive/ Re-transmit
Port status Address Table
traffic traffic process BPDU BPDU
Unit
Discarding No No No Yes No
Learning Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Forwarding Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Designated Root. Univocal identifier of the Bridge registered as Root for the segment
of the network which the port is connected to.
Designated Cost. Path Cost of the Designated port of the segment connected to the
porta.
Designated Bridge. Univocal identifier of the Bridge which the port considers the Bridge
Designated for the segment of the port. The Bridge Designated is the only Bridge allowed
to transmit the packets from/to the segment.
Designated Port. Identifier of the port on the Bridge Designated for the relevant seg-
ment. It represents the port through which the Bridge Designated forwards/receive the
packets to/from the segment.
Type. Operating state of the port in relation to the LAN segment connected to the port:
SharedLan. The port is treated as connected to a shared connection.
Point-to-Point. The port is treated as connected to a point-to-point connection.
See also

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redun-
dancy of the path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ether-
net network operates correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple
active paths cause loops in the network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the
messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges
into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a
stand-by status.
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of
Spanning Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
To make this possible, STP needs to know the whole network. The Bridges have to define the
main Bridge (Bridge Root) and calculate the role of the ports (Root, Designated, etc.) using the
known information. To ensure that every bridge has the information, the Bridges use special
packets called Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDU) for the exchange of information on the IDs of
the Bridges and on the cost of the path from the Root element.
The BPDU packets are periodically exchanged and allow the Switch keeping trace of the network
changes to start and stop the transmission of the ports, on demand.
A Bridge sends a BPDU packet using the univocal MAC address of the port as source address and
the STP multicast address 01:80:C2:00:00:00 as destination address.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

The protocol Rapid STP decreases, with respect to STP, the time necessary for the re-configu-
ration of the active network when the physical topology or the network configuration parameters
are changed.
The RSTP protocol has been designed to be compatible with the STP protocol.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
AGS-20
The equipment can be configured to work with the STP protocol or the RSTP protocol (see Verify/
modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP)).
The use of the protocol must be enabled at Switch level and at single port level (see Enable/
disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment).
Before enabling the protocol, it is suggested to set the relevant configuration parameters. By
WEB LCT, it is possible to configure:
PARAMETERS AT SWITCH LEVEL
System Control (see Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP
function).
Enable Ports (see Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function).
Dynamic Path Cost Calculation (see Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calcula-
tion function (STP/RSTP).
Status (see Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function).
Priority (see Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP).
Tx Hold Count (see Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in trans-
mission (STP/RSTP).
Max Age, Hello Time e Forward Delay (see Verify/modify the parameters for the
transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP).
PARAMETERS AT PORT LEVEL
Port Priority (see Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP).

RSTP Status (see Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port).
Path Cost (see Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP).

LLF
The command LLF allows configuring the operation of LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) functionality for the
equipment.
Operations
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality
Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio
GUI
LLF contextual area
See also
Bidirectional LLF (info)
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

The LLF contextual area displays the status of the LLF functionality for every equipment port.
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality
2. Press Add in Ports area.
3. Set, in the Port box, the LAN for the functionality is configured.
It is not possible to select the port LAN 3 or a port already selected for the functionality.
4. Set, in the LLF Status box, the status of LLF functionality:
Disable. The functionality is disabled.
Enable. The functionality is enabled.
5. Set, in the Alarm to Circuit box, the status of forwarding of the LLF alarm on a given radio circuit as-
sociated to the considered port:
Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.
Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.
6. Set, in the Delay Time box, the interval (hysteresis) (value between 0 and 10 seconds) after which the
modality Link Loss Forwarding in reception is activated.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id.
Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN.

In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the
radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN.
7. Only if the equipment has set the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC or if the equipment is in radio
configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W it is necessary to set, in the box Protection Mode, the propaga-
tion mode of LLF alarm:
Disable. The alarm LLF is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.
Enable. The alarm LLF is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.
8. Press OK.
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality
WARNING A port cannot be removed if there is at least one radio circuit associated to the port itself. If the
operator attempts executing this operation, the system displays an error message. First remove all the
radio circuits associated to the LAN and then remove the port.
2. Select the row of the table in the Ports area corresponding to the port for which you wish not to manage
the LLF functionality.
3. In the Ports area, press Remove and confirm.
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if:

The equipment has at least one Radio Link defined.
The specific port has been configured for the management of the LLF functionality.
2. In the Ports area, select the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the func-
tionality.
3. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, press Add.
4. In the Add New Circuit window, set the values of the following parameters:
Circuit. Circuit of the radio where transmitting the LOS signal. Every radio has eight circuits. It
is not possible to select an already used circuit (displayed grey in the selection menu).
LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
5. Press OK.
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN
2. Select, in the Ports area, the row of the table corresponding to the port for which you wish to remove
a radio circuit.

3. Select, in the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the row of the table corresponding to the
radio circuit you wish to remove.
4. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, press Remove and confirm.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the management of the LLF functionality has been
configured for the specific port.

The LLF Status box indicates the enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port:
2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in the menu.

The box Alarm to Circuit indicates the enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm for the LAN con-
sidered on the radio:
Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the remote equipment.
Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote equipment by means
of the selected radio circuit.
2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in menu.

The box Delay Time indicates the hysteresis value (in seconds) for the LLF functionality in reception.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id.
Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN.
In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the
radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN.
2. To change the hysteresis value, type the wished value in the box.

WARNING Operation available only:

For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC or equipment in radio configuration
2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W.
If the specific port has been configured for the management of the LLF functionality.

The box Protection Mode indicates the propagation modality of the LLF alarm:
Disable. The alarm LLF is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.
Enable. The alarm LLF is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.
2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in the menu.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the specific circuit of the radio for the forwarding of
the LOS alarm present on the LAN has been configured.
2. Select, in the Ports area, the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the func-
tionality.
In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the box LOS to Circuit indicates the enabling status
of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
Disable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is not forwarded to the radio.
Enable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is forwarded to the radio.
3. Press OK.

LLF contextual area
The contextual area shows the configuration of the LLF functionality (Link Loss Forwarding).
Parameters
PORTS
Port. Identifier of the port. The ID value is the combination between the slot number and
the port number (slot number/port number).
Descr. Name of the port:
LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).
LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).
LAN 4. Fourth Ethernet line port (electrical).
LAN 5. Fifth Ethernet line port (optical).
LAN 6. Sixth Ethernet line port (optical).
LAN C. Seventh Ethernet line port (optical)
LAN D. Eighth Ethernet line port (optical).
LLF Status. Enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port:
Alarm to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm present on the consid-
ered LAN to the radio:
Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the re-
mote equipment.
Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote
equipment by means of the selected radio circuit.
Delay Time. Hysteresis (in seconds) of LLF functionality in reception.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RA-
DIO... Link Id. Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables
the corresponding LAN.
In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be
cleared on the radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered
LAN.
Protection Mode. Propagation modality of LLF alarm:
Disable. The LLF alarm is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.
Enable. The LLF alarm is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.
Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Links in configuration 2+0 XPIC or
with equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W.
MAPPED CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION
Circuit. Radio circuit where forwarding the LOS signal.

Link ID. Identifier of the considered Radio Link.
LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
Signal Fail. Indication of alarm present on the circuit.
Push-button
Apply. Confirms the changes.
PORTS
Add. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality
Remove. Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality

MAPPED CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION
Add. Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN
Remove. Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given
LAN
Refresh Signal Fail. Updates the alarm signal.
See also
LLF (command)

The bidirectional LLF functionality allows interrupting the connection with the remote equipment (in both
directions) as consequence of the disabling of the LANs of the local equipment due to Link Loss Forwarding.
For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio connection, it is necessary to
perform the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you wish to disable the LAN-1 ports (on local and remote equipment) as consequence of LLF de-
tected by the local LAN-1 port. The Radio Link is in 1+0 configuration.
Operations to perform for the LOCAL equipment via the GUI:
a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.
b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values:
Port: LAN 1
LLF Status: Enable
Alarm to Circuit: Enable
Delay Time: any value
c. Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN selecting LAN 1
in the Ports area and setting the following values:
Circuit: #1 Link ID: ODU-A
LOS to Circuit: Enable
d. Press Apply and continue.
Operations to perform for the REMOTE equipment via the GUI:
a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.
b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values:
Port: LAN 1
LLF Status: Enable
Alarm to Circuit: Enable
Delay Time: any value
c. Press Apply and continue.
With this configuration, an alarm in reception on the remote terminal causes the activation of LLF alarm
and the consequent disabling of the associated LAN-1 port on both the terminals.
See also
LLF (command)
LLF contextual area

Queue Depth
The command Queue Depth manages the depth of the output queues.
Operations
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output
GUI
Queue Depth contextual area
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth.

The Queue Depth contextual area displays policy used to manage the depth of the queues in output.
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth.
2. Press the option Activate relevant to the policy you wish to activate and confirm.

Queue Depth contextual area
The contextual area displays the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output (8 queues
per port).
The Switch can insert a limited number of packets into every queue. This limit, indicated as depth, can be
configured by the user. During the period of high traffic, a queue is filled by packets waiting for the trans-
mission. When a queue reaches its limit, by default the Switch discards the packets until when the queue
is not full longer.
Parameters
Profile. Available profiles of the output queues:
Full dynamic memory. This configuration, identical for every queue, allows the dy-
namic allocation of memory per queue up to 1/8 of the total memory available in eve-
ry moment.
Priority based memory allocation.... This configuration is based on the principle for
which the lower priority traffic needs longer queues. The proper forwarding of the
traffic at the different priorities (and queue) allows achieving the wished length.
Uniform memory allocation.... This configuration provides queues with constant
length, independently from the traffic priority. The use of WRED algorithms allows
changing the method used to store the different traffic types, obtaining different
depths.
Line ports dynamic memory (no radio port). This configuration, identical for every
queue of the line ports, allows the dynamic allocation of memory per queue up to 1/
8 of the total memory available in every moment. The radio ports are not used.
Profile Description. Detailed description of the configuration of the selected profile.
If the selected option is:
Full dynamic memory. The description is the following:
Full dynamic memory allocation (hardware default)
Reference frame length: 2048 byte
Total reserved memory: 0 Mbyte
Total dynamic memory: 96 Mbyte
Radio ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0
Radio ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 17
Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0
Line ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 17
Priority based memory allocation (1 radio port). The description is the following:
Memory allocation dependent on scheduling priority
Lower priority queues are wider than higher priority queues
Total reserved memory: 81.5 Mbyte
Total dynamic memory: 14.5 Mbyte
Radio port reserved memory [Mbyte]: 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1, 0.512, 0.256
Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0.512, 0.256, 0.128, 0.064, 0.032, 0.032,
0.032
Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 1.4
Uniform memory allocation (1 radio port). The description is the following:
Uniform memory allocation
At each port, all queues have the same length
Total reserved memory: 76.5 Mbyte
Total dynamic memory: 19.5 Mbyte
Radio port reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4
Line ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 0.512
Radio port dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4
Priority based memory allocation (2 radio ports). The description is the following:
Memory allocation dependent on scheduling priority
Lower priority queues are wider than higher priority queues

Radio ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 16, 8, 4, 2, 1.000, 0.512, 0.256, 0.128
Radio ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 8, 4, 1, 1, 0.750, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200
Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0.512, 0.256, 0.128, 0.064, 0.032, 0.032,
0.032, 0.032
Line ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 0.750, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200,
0.200, 0.200
Uniform memory allocation (2 radio ports). The description is the following:
Uniform memory allocation
At each port, all queues have the same length
Radio ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 2.0
Radio ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 7.6
Line ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 0.256
Line ports dynamic memory (no radio port). The description is the following:
Restricted dynamic memory allocation:
Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0
Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 17
Action. Status of the profile:

Currently Active. Profile currently in use.
Activate. Profile not in use. Select the option to Modify the policy for the management
of the depth of the queues in output.
Push-button
See also
Queue Depth (command)

Statistics
Interface. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/
bytes in input/output.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Sta-
tistics group).

Interface
The Interface command displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32; when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statis-
tics group).
Operations
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group)
Reset the counters results (Interfaces group)
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group)
Reset the counters results (Ethernet-like Statistics group)
GUI
Interface contextual area
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group)
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface.

The Interface tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group).
Reset the counters results (Interfaces group)
WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistics counter (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-
vice Statistics).
2. In the Interface tab, press Reset Counters and confirm.

All the counters of the tab are set to zero.
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group)
2. Select the Ethernet tab.

The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group).

Reset the counters results (Ethernet-like Statistics group)
WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-
vice Statistics).
2. Select the Ethernet tab.
3. Press Reset Counters and confirm.

All the counters of the tab are set to zero.

Interface contextual area
The contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of pack-
ets/bytes in input/output.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statis-
tics group).
Tabs
Interface tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Interfaces group).
Ethernet tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Ethernet-like Statistics group).
Push-button
See also
Interface (command)
Interface tab
The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group).
Table
The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.6).
Push-button
Reset Counters. Reset the counters results (Interfaces group).
Ethernet tab
The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group).
Table

The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.7).
Push-button
Reset Counters. Reset the counters results (Ethernet-like Statistics group).
Tab.6 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group)
Packets with length Packet with length Packet with length

lower than longer than n between 64 and n
Counter 64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet) FCS *
Description
Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi
cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast
Received Octects x x x x x x x x x OK
Total number of octets received
x x x x x x x x x KO
Received Unicast Packets - - - - - - x - - OK
Total number of Unicast packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Not Unicast Packets - - - - - - - x x OK

Total number of Non-Unicast packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Discards (Packets) - - - - - - x x x OK

Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due
to forbidden forwarding or policing violation - - - - - - - - - KO
Received Errors x x x - - - - - - OK
Total number of inbound packets discarded because con-
tained errors. x x x x x x x x x KO
Transmitted Octects - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted octets
- - - - - - - - - KO
Transmitted Unicast Packets - - - - - - x - - OK
Total number of Unicast packets transmitted
- - - - - - - - - KO
Transmitted Not Unicast Packets - - - - - - - x x OK

Total number of Non-Unicast packets transmitted
- - - - - - - - - KO
Transmitted Discards (Packets) - - - x x x x x x OK

Total number of outbound packets discarded
- - - - - - - - - KO
x Counter incremented
- Counter not incremented.
* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.

KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

Tab.7 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group)

Description
Align. Errors - - - - - - - - - OK
A count of frames received on a particular interface that
are not an integral number of octets in length and do not
pass the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is in-
cremented when the Alignment Error status is returned by
the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received x x x x x x x x x KO
frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, ac-
cording to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Manage-
ment, counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC.
FCS Errors - - - - - - - - - OK
are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass
the FCS check.
cremented when the Frame Check Error status is returned
by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Re- - - - x x x x x x KO
ceived frames for which multiple error conditions obtain
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Man-
agement, counted exclusively according to the error status
This value does not include packets shorter than 64 bytes.
Frame Too Long - - - x x x - - - OK

exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
cremented when the Frame Too Long status is returned by
the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received - - - x x x - - - KO
frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, ac-
cording to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Manage-
ment, counted exclusively according to the error status


DCN (LAN 3)
MNGT Port Configuration. It manages the Ethernet port reserved to supervision of the equipment (LAN
3).
Routing Table. It manages the Routing Table of the equipment.

MNGT Port Configuration
WARNING In version 1.1, the system can be managed by means of the In-Band Management using the
port LAN 3 (management port) for the contemporary transport of traffic and supervision (VLAN dedicated).
The MNGT Port Configuration command manages the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote super-
vision of the equipment (management port).
Operations
Verify the configuration of the management port
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision
Modify the enabling status of management port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port
Modify the transmission speed of the management port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port
GUI
MNGT Port Configuration contextual area
Verify the configuration of the management port
1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration.
The MNGT Port Configuration contextual area displays the configuration of the management port.
2. In the IP Address box, set the IP address of the management port.

The address has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field.
3. In the Net Mask box, set the mask for the network address definition.

5. Press Store and confirm.
2. In the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.

WARNING The management VLAN must be present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab) and, in order
to operate correctly as VLAN for the In-band Management, LAN 3 must be enabled for the transit of the
packets with VLAN ID equal to that of VLAN.
The VLAN can have, as Member Port, other Ethernet ports. In this case, even these ports will be used for
the contemporary transit of traffic and supervision (In-band Management).
2. Set, in the VLAN ID box, the wished VLAN.

The list will display all the VLANs registered in VLAN Table.

2. In the Admin State box, select the option:
Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status -
Down).
WARNING Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works properly if the two peers have set the same
autonegotiation management modality.
The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one
of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter.
2. In the Auto Neg. box, select the option:

Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the
peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonego-
tiation, the modality Full Duplex without flow control is proposed.
Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in
the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of the management port), the flow control id
disabled and the operation modality is Full Duplex.

WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is disabled (Auto Neg. - Disabled).

If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after
having negotiated with the peer at the other end of the connection.
The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one
of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter.
2. In the Speed box, select the option:

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port
WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. - Enabled).
2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm.
WARNING The alarm can be enabled/disabled using the Alarm Severity Config. command.
The only difference is that, with this operation, you intervene only on the alarm Loss of Signal of the man-
agement port (LAN 3) while, in the context Alarm Severity Config, you intervene on the alarm Loss of Sig-
nal of all the LANs.
Depending on the setting made in the two contexts, the alarm status will be as indicated in Tab.8.
2. In the Port Alarm Report box, select the option:

Disabled, to disable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is not registered in the equipment
controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as
the alarm had never occurred.
Enabled, to enable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is registered in the equipment control-
ler and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual
area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current
alarms and the history alarms.

Tab.8 Enabling status of the Loss of Signal alarm
Context
MNGT Port Configuration Alarm Severity Config * Loss of Signal Alarm

(Port Alarm Report) (Severity)
Enabled Disabled Disabled alarm
Enabled Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical Enabled alarm
Disabled Disabled Disabled alarm

Disabled Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical Disabled alarm
* In this context the Loss of Signal Alarm is called ethLanPhyLinkLoss.

MNGT Port Configuration contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote supervi-
sion of the equipment (management port).
Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the management port.
Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
Default Gateway. IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway from the management
port.
VLAN ID. VLAN reserved for the in band supervision (In-Band Management).
PHYSICAL INTERFACE
Port Alarm Report. Enabling state of the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port:
Disabled. Alarm disabled: the detection of the alarm is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible
management program: as the alarm had never occurred.
Enabled. Alarm enabled: the detection of the alarm is registered in the equip-
ment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the
management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history
alarms.
Admin State. Enabling state of the management port:
Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive
traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work.
Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the management port and a de-
vice in network:
Up. The physical connection is active and ready for the traffic exchange.
Down. The physical connection does not work: no physical connection has
been enabled or the established physical connection is not active or is defec-
tive.
Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port:
Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission
speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal
mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex modality without flow
control is proposed.
Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission
speed configured in the Speed box, the flow control is disabled and the oper-
ation modality is Full Duplex.
Speed. Data transmission speed of the management port.
Push-button
Store. Store the values into the equipment controller.

Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller.
Restart Auto Neg. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port.

See also
MNGT Port Configuration (command)

Routing Table
WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other net-
works is not necessary, the Routing Table must not be necessarily defined because the network can man-
age its own internal traffic. Setting the Routing Table is necessary when equipment must send packets
between two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing
functionality of the equipment).
The Routing Table command manages the Routing Table of the equipment.
Operations
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
GUI
Routing Table contextual area
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment
1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table.

The Routing Table contextual area displays the Routing Table of the equipment.
Add an element to the Routing Table
2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the Subnet Mask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
5. Set, in Next Hop box, the type of the next element by which the IP network or the destination element
can be reached:
Interface. Local interface to the equipment.
Gateway. Network element which allows reaching a remote network.
6. If, in the step before, the selected value is:

Interface, set in the box Interface the option:
VLAN. Local equipment interface, where the management traffic routed by VLAN (see
MNGT Port Configuration contextual area).
This element is mandatorily associated to the routing via VLAN.
LCT. Interface for the local management of the equipment (connettore LCT).
Gateway, set the IP address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network in the Gate-
way box.
7. Set, in the Distance box, the metric value of the destination (value between 1 and 255).

The new element is inserted into the table.

Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
2. Select the element of the Routing Table.

Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

The system deletes the element into the Routing Table of the equipment.

Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the Routing Table currently used by the equipment.
Table
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table for which are indicated:
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Parameter not meaningful for the elements relevant to the equipment local interfaces
(VLAN).
Subnet Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Interface. Local interface of the equipment.
VLAN. Interface where the management traffic is routed by VLAN (see MNGT
Port Configuration contextual area.
This element is mandatorily associated to the routing through VLAN.
LCT. Interface for the local management of the equipment (connettore LCT).
Parameter not meaningful for the elements which identify the Gateway.
Distance. Metric value of the destination.
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the equipment and desti-
nation IP network or element:
Connected. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equip-
ment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by
the equipment software according to their own IP address and NetMask.
Static. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the
equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually in-
serted by the user (static element).
Push-button
Add. Add an element to the Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table.
See also
Routing Table (command)

TDM Tributaries
E1. It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.

E1
WARNING Command available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary.
Operations
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s
Modify the label of an E1
Activate/deactivate the E1 use
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops
Modify the management status of LOS alarm
GUI
E1 contextual area
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s
1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1.

The E1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the E1.

The Tributary column displays the label of each tributary.
2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of maximum
40 characters.

The Enable column displays the tributary use status.
2. To modify the tributary use status, select the relevant box and then the option:
Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhib-
ited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.
Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.
Press Enable All to set the Enable value for all the tributaries.
Press Disable All to set the Disable value for all the tributaries.

If the tributary is enabled and you are disabling it, the message Do you want Los Inversion enable? is
displayed. Pressing:
Yes, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
No, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

The column:
Line Loop indicates the loop status on line side for every single tributary: Line Loop Enabled
(loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
Internal Loop indicates the loop status on internal side for every single tributary: Int. Loop En-
abled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).
2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the option:
Disable, to disable the loop.
Enable, to enable the loop.
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.

The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivat-
ed.
WARNING Operation available only if the tributary is disabled.

The Los Inversion column displays the management status of LOS alarm.
2. To modify the management status of LOS alarm, select the relevant box and then the option:
Los inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled,
the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
No Los Inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary
disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

E1 contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
The context displays the status and the configuration of the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
Table
Every table row corresponds to a tributary.
The first row of the box refers to the first tributary of TDM module (E1-1), the second row to the
second tributary of TDM module (E1-2) and so on up to 16th row representing the last tributary
of the TDM module.
For each tributary, the following parameters are reported:
Tributary. Tributary label.
Enable. Tributary use status:
Disable (white box). Tributary not active (tributary not used). In this condi-
tion, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on
the setting of the Los Inversion box.
Enable (green box). Tributary active (tributary used). In this condition, the
controller does not inhibit the alarms.
Line Loop. Line side loop status:
Line Loop Enabled (green box). Line loop active.
---- (white box). Loop not active.
Internal Loop. internal side loop status:
Int. Loop Enabled (green box). Internal loop active.
---- (white box). Loop not active.
Los Inversion. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used:
Los inversion (green box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is
raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
--- (white box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if,
with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
The status of the Los Inversion box is meaningful only if the tributary is not used.
LOS Alarm / AIS Alarm. The colour of box indicates the status of the relevant alarm:
White (no wording). The alarm is not active.
Red, orange, yellow or light blue (LOS or AIS wording). The alarm is active and
has severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Push-button
Enable All. Set the Enable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
Disable All. Set the Disable value (Enable column) for all E1s.
See also
E1 (command)

Cross Connection
The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.
Operations
Display the connections of the equipment
Execute a Tributary-Radio connection
Execute a Radio-Radio connection
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
Delete one or more connections
Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop)
GUI
Cross Connection contextual area
See also
Cross connection matrix (info)
Display the connections of the equipment
1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection.

The Cross Connection contextual area displays the list of all the cross connection.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) with at least one Radio
Link defined and a value of permanent Radio E1 channels different from zero.
2. Press Add.
3. Set, un the Name box, the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric string with minimum
1 and maximum 32 characters).
4. Set the first endpoint of the connection (1st End Point area):
a. Select, in the Carrier box, the PPI option (tributary stream).
b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 channel.

The options in grey are not available because already used for another connection.
5. Set the second endpoint of the connection (2nd End Point area):
a. Select, in the Carrier box, the Radio-<radio branch> option.
b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 Radio channel.
6. Press Ok and confirm.

When the message Operation done, want to create another cross-connection is displayed, press:
Yes to open the Add X Connection window again for the creation of a new connection.

No to return to context Cross Connection.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) with at least one Radio
Link defined and a value of permanent Radio E1 channels different from zero.
It is possible to create a connection between two channels of two different radio streams or of the same
radio stream.
2. Press Add.


2. Press Add.



Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop)
3. Activate the Loop Back option.
4. In the 1st End Point area, select in the Carrier box the stream (PPI or Radio...) and in the Time Slot
box the unused channel for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.

2. Select the connection you wish to delete.

The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

The contextual area shows the connections of the equipment.
Table
Every table row corresponds to a connection.
For each connection, the following parameters are reported:
Name. Name of the connection.
Type. Type of connection:
Unprotected. Tributary-Radio connection, Radio-Radio connection or Tribu-
tary-Tributary connection.
Loopback. Loop of channel on itself.
1st End and 2nd End. Channels composing the connection:
PPI E1-<E1 number>. E1 channel of the TDM module.
Radio-<radio branch> E1-<E1 number>. High priority Radio E1 channel (Per-
manent) of the specific radio direction.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction
of the connection (1st End -> 2nd End) only for clarity of explanation.
The column 2nd End is not meaningful for the loops.
When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow with the tip upwards is
displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow with the tip
downwards is displayed) an so on.
Push-button
Add. Execute a Tributary-Radio connection, Execute a Radio-Radio connection, Execute a Trib-
utary-Tributary connection, Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop).
Remove. Delete one or more connections.
See also
Cross Connection (command)

For AGS-20 equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9), a matrix is available for the cross-connection of the
E1 channels of the tributaries to the high-priority Radio E1 channels (Permanent) of every radio direction.
Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of unprotected connection:
Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary E1 channel and a Radio E1.
Radio-Radio. Single connection between two different E1 Radio channels.
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary E1 channels.
Loop. Loop of a tributary E1 channel a Radio E1 channel on itself.
The connections involving a Radio E1 are available only for equipment with Radio module (see
Tab.4) with at least one Radio Link defined and a value of the permanent Radio e1 channels
different from zero.
E1 channels
Port Stream Configuration Availability
PPI E1 (2Mbit/s) E1 of the TDM module Always available

Radio ODU A x E1 Port/channels available for equip-
(high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma- ment with Radio module, with Ra-
Radio channels) nent TDM Traffic parame- dio Link in 1+0 or 1+1
ter (ODU A) configuration and the value x
greater than 0
Radio-A ODU A x E1 Port/channels available for equip-

(high priority E1 x = Value of the Perma- ment with Radio module, with Ra-
Radio channels) nent TDM Traffic parame- dio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration
ter (ODU A) or two Radio Link in 1+0 configu-
ration (equipment in 2x(1+0) or
2x(1+0) E-W configuration) and
the value x greater than 0
Radio-B ODU B y E1 Port/channels available for equip-

(high priority E1 y = Value of the Perma- ment with Radio module, with Ra-
Radio channels) nent TDM Traffic parame- dio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration
ter (ODU B) or two Radio Link in 1+0 configu-
ration (equipment in 2x(1+0) or
2x(1+0) E-W configuration) and
the value y greater than 0
Cross-connection management
All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user.
The user can display the cross-connections existing in equipment via GUI (WEB LCT and/or WEB
CT).
For each connection the name, the edge channels and the connection type are pointed out.
In any moment the user can delete one or more cross-connections.
If the user performs one of the following operations, the system automatically removes the con-
nections ending on the (tributary or stream) stream subject of the change:
Configuration change of the Radio Link (see Radio Configurator).
Configuration change of the high priority E1 Radio channels (see BW & Mod./Link ID
- Permanent TDM Traffic).

Tab.9 TDM module configuration
Equipment type * TDM Module TDM interface (E1) TDM matrix
AGS-20 Switch - - -
AGS-20 Single-IF - - -
AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1 x x x
AGS-20 Dual-IF - - -
AGS-20 Dual-IF 16xE1 x x x
* See Verify the equipment units

x Option available.
- Option not available.
See also
Cross Connection (command)

SYNCHRONISATION
The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Operations
T0 SYNCHRONISM
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism
SYNCHRONISM SOURCES
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH
Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B
Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without wait-
ing for the expiry of Wait Time
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LANs
sources
Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
GUI
Synchronisation contextual area
See also
Synchronisation (info)
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism

1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.

The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).
Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.

The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the se-
lection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.

The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the syn-
chronism
WARNING This operation can be executed only if the Sync Quality management functionality is enabled
The parameter Status indicates the status of use of the source quality level as criterion to select the
synchronism:
On. Use enabled.
Off. Use disabled.

WARNING Before disabling the synchronisation management (all the sources Dis.), it is suggested to tem-
porarily force the status of synchronism T0 to Free Running (and then reset it to Locked) to avoid the oc-
currence of the alarms BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm and BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status (see Force
the status of the T0 synchronisation).
2. Select the T0 tab.

The Priority column displays the management of synchronisation:
If all the sources are disabled (value Dis.), the synchronisation management has been disabled
(the clocks are generated by the internal local reference).
If at least one source is enabled, the synchronisation management is enabled.
3. To change the management to Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source.
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources


The tab displays the status and configuration of the synchronism sources.


The Priority column shows the usage status of each source.
3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 ac-
cording to the desired priority level to assign to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Priority column shows the priority level of each source.
3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: min-
imum priority).


Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:
Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
4. Press Apply changes.

Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.


WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.
3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sourc-
es and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.

The box Source of the row T3 SYNCH indicates the type of source currently in use:
2Mb/s. Tributary with 2Mb/s interface.
2MHz. Tributary with 2MHz interface.

WARNING The selected source must correspond to the real signal in input to the equipment. A wrong
configuration (2Mb/s instead of 2MHz or vice versa) will cause a fleeting alarm.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changed executed.


The box Source of the row TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B indicates the LAN of the Ethernet Switch cur-
rently in use for every specific source: LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4, LAN 5, LAN 6.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option in the box.

A value set for the source TE SyncE A will not be available for source TE SyncE B and vice versa.


The box Source of the row T2 E1 indicates E1 currently in use for the source: Trib.1 Trib.16.
The wording None indicates that no tributary is selected as synchronism source.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option in the box.


WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.
For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.
3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the SSM is DNU (see Quality of syn-
chronism source).
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the equipment clock.
DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism

without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 syn-
chronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.

The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is consid-
ered elapsed.

User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
2. Select the LAN SSM tab.

The tab shows the configuration parameters and the enabling status of the SSM messages (Synchro-
nization Status Message) for the LAN interfaces.
3. To change the management of the SSM messages, in the SSM Enable box in corresponding of the
wished LAN, select the option:
On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.
Off. The messages are not managed.

WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface.

Operation available only for the LANs not selected as synchronisation sources and for the LANs selected
as synchronisation sources which the use of SSM messages is not active for. When one LAN is selected as
synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role of the line synchronism is
dynamically managed by the system.
2. Select the 1000Base-T Role tab.

The tab shows the configuration parameters and the line synchronism direction for the LAN with elec-
trical interface.
3. To modify the direction of a LAN, select the relevant box in the Role column and then one of the fol-
lowing option:
Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed
by SSM independently from the setting of the port parameters.
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1
synchronism sources
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.
Operation meaningful only for framed E1 (2Mbit/s).

2. Select the Sa Bit tab.

The T3 SYNC box indicates the spare bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality
level of the sources T3 SYNC.
Parameter meaningful only if the T3 SYNC source is configured with 2Mb/s interface.
The T2 E1 box indicates the spare bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality
level of the sources T2 E1.
Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9)
3. To change a parameter, set the wished value in the relevant box: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8.
Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation
Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of equipment is described. For the correct configu-
ration of the functionality for a Radio Link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of
traffic and synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.

The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1
equipment tributary.
Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column:
Name. Label of E1 tributary.
E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:
Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
On. The E1 re-timing function is active.
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indi-
cates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then
the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.

The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Tabs
General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 synchronism.
T0 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources.
LAN SSM tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LANs.
1000Base-T Role tab. Role of the LAN synchronism sources.
Sa Bit tab. Configuration of the spare bits for the sources T2 E1 and T3 SYNC.
E1 Retiming tab. Retiming of E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisa-
tion.
Push-button
See also
Synchronisation (command)
General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.
Parameters
ALARMS
Alarms status of the T0 synchronism. The colour of each box displays the status of the
specific alarm:
SETTING
Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is gener-
ated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
TIME
Hold Off Time. Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated
frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having
a valid signal.
WTR Time. Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to the
selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the
selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time. Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):
LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds
with the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm
itself.

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive sec-
onds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deacti-
vates the alarm itself.
QUALITY
Current. Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that
taken from the SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the
SSM is DNU (see Quality of synchronism source).
PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Generally the quality of T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the source from
which T0 is retrieved.
Status. Status of use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the syn-
chronism:
On. Use enabled.
Off. Use not enabled.
See also
T0 tab
The tab displays the Configuration and status of the synchronism T0.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one source for which are indicated:
Name. Synchronism source name:
Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM
3e).
T3 SYNC. Source extracted from the synchronism port SYNC (2Mb/s or 2MHz).
TE SyncE A. First source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 LAN 6).
TE SyncE B. Second source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 LAN
6).
T2 E1. Source extracted from one of the equipment E1 tributaries.
Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
ODU/LAN A. Source extracted from the Radio A interface.
ODU/LAN B. Source extracted from the Radio B interface.
Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).
ODU/LAN C. Source extracted from the LAN C interface.
ODU/LAN D. Source extracted from the LAN D interface.

Source. Type of source used as synchronism:
2Mb/s. 2Mb/s signal on SYNC connector (RJ45).
2MHZ. 2MHz signal on SYNC connector (RJ45).
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4, LAN 5, LAN 6. LANs of the Ethernet switch. LAN
1 and LAN 2 are available both when are configured as electrical and optical
interface.
Trib. <number>. E1 tributary (2Mb/s interface).
None. No tributary is selected as synchronism source.
Priority. Status and priority use of the source:
Dis. The synchronism source is not used.
<1 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed
out by the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
WARNING If all the sources are disabled, the synchronisation management is disabled.
Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:
Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 syn-
chronism.
On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation
of the T0 synchronism (Manual Operation).
Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:
Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other ena-
bled synchronism sources.
On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled
synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced
sources) is used for the generation of the synchronism.
Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and
Timing Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status
of the specific alarm:
Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception:
UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
The wording (ovw) indicates that the quality level in reception is forced by the operator.
For the source T3 SYNC, if the set interface is 2MHz, the quality level in reception is not
inserted into the transmitted signal; if the set interface is 2Mb/s, it is possible to manage
the spare bit for the indication of the received quality (see Sa Bit tab).
Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the
protocol calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality pa-
rameter.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the source quality level in reception:

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown
none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that
taken from the SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the
SSM is DNU (see Quality of synchronism source).
Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment ex-
tracts the synchronization T0 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.
Push-button
Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without
waiting for the expiry of Wait Time.
See also
LAN SSM tab
WARNING Tab available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is en-
abled.
The tab shows the enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LANs.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a LAN for which are indicated:
Port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of the slot number and the
port number (slot number/port number).
Description. Name of the port.
LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).

LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).
LAN 3. Third Ethernet line port (electrical) (management port).
LAN 5. Fifth Ethernet line port (optical).
LAN 6. Sixth Ethernet line port (optical).
LAN C. Seventh Ethernet line port (optical)
LAN D. Eighth Ethernet line port (optical).
Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.
---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (for example, Radio port).
Combo (...). Ethernet port with interface programmable by the user: electrical
or optical. The type of set interface is indicated in brackets:
(Copper): electrical interface.
(Fiber): optical interface.
SSM Enable. Management status of the SSM messages for the equipment LANs:
On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.
Off. The messages are not managed.
Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception:
UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
For the source T3 SYNC, if the set interface is 2MHz, the quality level in reception is not
inserted into the transmitted signal; if the set interface is 2Mb/s, it is possible to manage
the spare bit for the indication of the received quality (see Sa Bit tab).
Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the
protocol calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality pa-
rameter.
Rx Pkts. Number of packets received on the corresponding port.
Tx Pkts. Number of packets transmitted by the corresponding port.
Rx Dropped Packets. Number of packets dropped among those received on the corre-
sponding port.
Rx Errored Packets. Number of errored packets among those received on the corre-
sponding port.
Push-button

See also
1000Base-T Role tab
WARNING The parameters are not meaningful for the LANs with electrical interface which:
Are not selected as synchronism sources.
Are selected as synchronism sources for which the use of SSM messages is not active.
When one LAN is selected as synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role
of the line synchronism is dynamically managed by the system.
The tab displays the direction of the line synchronism for the LANs with electrical interface.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to a LAN for which are indicated:
Port. Identifier of the port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of
the slot number and the port number (slot number/port number).
LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical).
LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical).
LAN 3. Third Ethernet line port (electrical) (management port).
Combo (Copper). Ethernet port with electrical interface.
Role. Line synchronism direction for the LANs with electrical interface displayed in the
table:
Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line
(Loop Time).
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is auto-
matically managed by SSM independently from the setting of the port param-
eters.
Push-button
See also

Sa Bit tab
WARNING Tab available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, is
enabled.
The tab shows the management of quality values for T3 SYNC and E1 T2 sources.
Parameters
T3 SYNC. Spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the
source T3 SYNC (Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8).
Parameter meaningful only if the T3 SYNC source is configured with 2Mb/s interface.
T2 E1. Spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source
T2 E1 (Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8).
Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
See also
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sourc-
es
E1 Retiming tab
WARNING Tab available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9)
The tab shows the parameters to re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and syn-
chronisation.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to an E1 for which are indicated:
Name. Label of E1 tributary: ppi_<number>.
E1 Retiming. Status of the E1 re-timing function of the tributary:
Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
On. The E1 re-timing function active.
Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is ac-
tive, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm
deactivated).
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated associated respectively to the
Green. Alarm activated associated to the Status severity level.
Push-button
See also
Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
See also
Synchronisation (command)
Management of synchronisation
AGS-20 equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.

When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Verify/modify the
management of synchronisation).
Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources:

Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM 3e).
T3 SYNC. Source extracted from the synchronism port SYNC (2Mb/s or 2MHz).
TE SyncE A. First source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 LAN 6).
TE SyncE B. Second source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 LAN 6).
T2 E1. Source extracted from one of the equipment E1 tributaries.
ODU/LAN A. Source extracted from the Radio A interface.
ODU/LAN B. Source extracted from the Radio B interface.
ODU/LAN C. Source extracted from the LAN C interface.
ODU/LAN D. Source extracted from the LAN D interface.
Enabling of the synchronism sources
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).

Priority of the synchronism source
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).
The source with the highest priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment
(if a forcing or a preferential source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will au-
tomatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
The source is not physically present.
The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3e)
is greater than 7 ppm.
If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.
Quality of synchronism source
Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.

When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).
The quality level of one source is contained in the Synchronisation Status Messages (SSM). These messag-
es are periodically transmitted; the absence of a message is considered as condition of failure of the syn-
chronisation mechanism.
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:
PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.
SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-
T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.
SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the syn-
chronism local units.
SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.
Synchronism sources TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B (Ethernet)

The technology Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) allows converting Ethernet into a synchronous
network through the transmission of the frequency information over the physical level. It allows
a master-slave synchronisation architecture, where the time information is transferred port to
port by the physical level. The selection of the roles of Master and Slave takes place through the
transmission of SSM messages.
The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN.
For the synchronism sources TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B, the quality management depends on
the LAN interface and by the management of the SSM messages as indicated here below.

SSM messages Line synchronism Quality management Quality management in
LAN configuration
management direction (role) * in input (Rx) output (Tx)
LAN with electrical Enable Role dynamically Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or
interface used as managed by the tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
synchronism source ** system packet the considered LAN) is in-
serted in the transmitted
packet.
Disable Role set by Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not
operator *** transmitted
LAN with optical Enable Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or
interface used as tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
synchronism source ** - packet the considered LAN) is in-
serted in the transmitted
packet.
Disable Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not

-
transmitted
LAN with electrical Enable Role set by SSM messages are not Quality value of T0 is in-
interface not used as operator *** managed serted in the transmitted
synchronism source packet
Disable Role set by SSM messages are not SSM messages are not
operator *** managed transmitted
LAN with optical Enable SSM messages are not Quality value of T0 is in-
interface not used as - managed serted in the transmitted
synchronism source packet
Disable SSM messages are not SSM messages are not

-
managed transmitted
* Parameter meaningful only for LAN with 1000Base-T electrical interface.

** LAN connected to the TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B input (see Set the used as synchronism
source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B).
*** See Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LANs
Synchronism sources ODU/LAN x

For the synchronism source ODU/LAN x, the quality management depends on the management
of SSM messages as indicated here below.
Synchronism SSM messages Quality management in in- Quality management in

sources management put (Rx) output (Tx)
ODU/LAN A Enable Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or

ODU/LAN B* tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
ODU/LAN C packet the considered LAN) is in-
ODU/LAN D serted in the transmitted
packet.
Disable Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not

transmitted
* Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).
Synchronism sources T2 E1 (E1 tributary)

WARNING Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
For the synchronism sources T2 E1, the management of the quality depends on the E1 re-timing
function as displayed here below.

Synchronism E1 re-timing Quality management in out- Quality management in input
sources function put (Tx) (Rx)
T2 E1 Quality value of T0 is insert- Quality value (SSM) is ex-

Enable
ed in the spare bits * tracted from the spare bits
Disable Quality not managed **
* Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary.

** Value UNK.
Synchronism sources T3 SYNC

For the synchronism sources T3 SYNC, the management of the quality depends on the interface
type as displayed here below.
Synchronism Quality management in out- Quality management in input

Interface
sources put (Tx) (Rx)
T3 SYNC 2Mb/s Quality value of T0 is insert- Quality value (SSM) is ex-

ed in the spare bits * tracted from the spare bits
2MHz Quality not managed **
* Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary.

** Quality value not inserted in the transmitted signal.
WEB LCT
As regards the quality management via the GUI, it is possible:
sources
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality man-
agement equipment feature).
If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available
(see Verify the equipment feature).
Forcing of a synchronism source
This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).
This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of preferential synchronism source
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a syn-
chronism source as preferential).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest priority.

When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:
Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
Forcing of the source
Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
Preferential source
Source priority
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:

The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisa-
tion).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisa-
tion
WARNING Function available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adap-
tive modulation (ACM).
Generally, the tributaries of equipment TDM module transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following exam-
ple.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.4).
Fig.4 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment REMOTE equipment
SETS SETS
manage- manage-
ment ment
Tributary 1 Tributary 1

Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of GUI:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Verify/modify the management of syn-
chronisation).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2 E1 (see Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for
input T2 E1).
d. Set the source T2 E1 as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of GUI:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Verify/modify the management of syn-
chronisation).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the source ODU/LAN A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).

For equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration, set the source ODU/LAN A or ODU/
LAN B depending on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (see Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of
traffic and synchronisation).
WARNING In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on
more E1, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the
tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source.

RADIO
WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio
Link defined.
Radio Branch. It manages the radio parameters.

Radio Branch
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 or 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the Radio Branch
command. For the configurations 1+1 Hot Standby or 2+0 XPIC, the parameters present in the context
refer both to ODU A and ODU B.
For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1 Frequency Diversity or in 2x(1+0) radio configu-
ration the commands Radio Branch ODU A (ODU A parameters) and Radio Branch ODU B (ODU B pa-
rameters) are present.
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.
Operations
Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile
GUI
Radio Branch contextual area
Verify/modify the duplex frequency
1. Select Radio > Radio Branch.

The Dplx Freq parameter indicates the duplex frequency (MHz) of the equipped radio.
The displayed value is always positive, independently from the position of the transmission frequency
with respect to the receiving frequency.
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on
WARNING Setting the parameter does NOT automatically modify even the RF frequency of remote equip-
ment.
Before setting the transmission frequency of the equipment, set the duplex frequency value.

The Tx Freq parameter indicates the transmission frequency of the equipment.
2. To change the parameter, it is possible to:
Set in the Tx Freq box the wished frequency value using the fine tuning step (typically 125 KHz).

Press Freq. Table to display the table of the frequencies (see ITU-R F2006). Select the wished
value and press Ok. If this value was not present in the table, the radio can be however tuned
with fine tuning.
Push-button available only if the channelling file has been previously loaded on the equipment.
In case of fine-step file (less than 1 MHz), the frequency table does not contain any value to
avoid reading not meaningful values.
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)

The Prx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx
change).
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)

The Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx
change).
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC
2. Select the ODU Powers tab.

The Tx Power Control area indicates the functioning status of the ATPC:
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).
Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception.
The thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the threshold of the
ATPC device). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see Verify/modify the
maximum output power value at the transmitter).

Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter
WARNING Asymmetrical configuration of the Radio Link between local and remote equipment, as regards
the value of Ptx / modulation, are not supported.

The Max Ptx: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the trans-
mitter (Ptx nominal value).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. If you wish to set the maximum value
of available range, activate the box ATPC Full Range.
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation
WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power Control
parameter - Automatic value).

The ATPC Regulation: <current value> dB parameter indicates the range of the ATPC regulation (ex-
pressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper
limit of the range.
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device

In the ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area the threshold of the ATPC is pointed out:
High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold
value.
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold val-
ue.
3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.

Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every
ACM profile

In the Current Power area the table resuming the power in transmission for every ACM profile is dis-
played.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
Values of minimum power available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic.
ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. Minimum threshold (Min) and maximum threshold (Max) of ATPC
device.
Values available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic.
Press Refresh to update the table.

Radio Branch contextual area
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 or 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the Radio Branch
command. For the configurations 1+1 Hot Standby or 2+0 XPIC, the parameters present in the context
refer both to ODU A and ODU B.
For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1 Frequency Diversity or in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-
W radio configuration there are the commands Radio Branch ODU A (which opens the context area Radio
Branch ODU A containing the radio parameters of ODU A) and Radio Branch ODU B (which opens the
context area Radio Branch ODU B containing the radio parameters of ODU B).
The contextual area displays the radio parameters.
Tabs
ODU Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, power resolution.
ODU Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC.
Push-button
Apply. Confirms the changes.
See also
Radio Branch (command)
ODU Settings tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions).
Parameters
TX FREQUENCY SELECTOR
Tx Freq. Frequency of the radio transmission. The wording:
Must be Set indicates that for the radio a channel is not planned.
HW Fail indicates a hardware problem.
Dplx Freq. Frequency of duplex.
MEASUREMENTS RESOLUTION
Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equip-
ment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value
corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of
the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equip-
ment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx val-
ue corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the chang-
ing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
Push-button
Freq. Table. Display the table of the preferential frequencies.
See also
Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)

Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
ODU Powers tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Parameters
TX POWER CONTROL
Operating status of the ATPC device:
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disa-
ble).
Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The
parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in auto-
matic one.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in
dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the up-
per limit of the range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power
Control parameter - Automatic value) and the box ATPC Full Range is not active.
ATPC Full Range. The active box ( ) indicates that the ATPC device operates at the
maximum limit of the range; the inactive box indicates that the maximum limit of the
ATPC device is indicated by the parameter ATPC Regulation.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power
Control parameter - Automatic value).
ATPC THRESHOLDS ON LOCAL PRX

High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set
threshold value
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set
threshold value.
CURRENT POWER
The table resuming the power in transmission for every ACM profile. Every table row corre-
sponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile.
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the trans-
mitter
Values of minimum power available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Au-
tomatic.
ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. Minimum threshold (Min) and maximum threshold
(Max) of ATPC device.
Values available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic.
Table available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Push-button
Refresh. Updates the table.
See also
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)

MAINTENANCE
S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).

PRBS. It manages the PRBS device.
Radio Loop & Cmd. It manages the radio loops.
Manual Operations. It manages the manual operations.
PSU Alarm Config.. It manages the Power Supply Unit alarms.
Radio Switch. It manages the radio switch.
RMON. It manages the count of the RMon statistics.

S/N Meas
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration is present the S/N Meas command. For the equip-
ment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio con-
figuration are present the S/N Meas ODU A (branch A S/N measure) and S/N Meas ODU B (branch B
S/N measure) commands.
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
Operations
Verify the value of the S/N measure
Update the value of the S/N measure
GUI
S/N Meas. contextual area
Verify the value of the S/N measure
1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.
Update the value of the S/N measure
1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio.
2. Press Refresh to update the value.

S/N Meas. contextual area
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration the S/N Meas command is available which opens
the S/N Meas contextual area.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-
W radio configuration the commands S/N Meas ODU A, which opens the S/N Meas ODU A contextual area
containing the parameters relevant to S/N measure of branch A, and S/N Meas ODU B, which opens the
S/N Meas ODU B contextual area containing the parameters relevant to S/N measure of branch B, are avail-
able.
The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure.
Parameters
S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio.
The measure is always in progress.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure
See also
S/N Meas (command)

PRBS
The PRBS command manages the PRBS device.
Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
Activate/reset the PRBS measure
Deactivate the PRBS measure
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
GUI
PRBS contextual area
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure
1. Select Maintenance > PRBS.

The PRBS contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.
2. Select the Start-Reset option (Start/Stop parameter).

The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.
2. Select the Stop option (Start/Stop parameter).

The Test Pattern parameter indicates the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure.

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.

The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure.

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (116).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.
3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.

Only if the Enable option is selected a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immedi-
ately enabled to the use and then a message warns you are executing a forcing and displays the current
setting of the timeout.

Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.

PRBS contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.
Parameters
GENERAL
BER. Dynamically updated BER value during the measure
Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure
Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in day/hours/minutes/seconds) range after the meas-
ure active
Fail Alarms (option). Number of times that the Fail Alarm activated from the start of the
measure.
Fail Alarm (box). Status of the Fail Alarm. The colour of the box represents the alarm
status and severity:
Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
Start/Stop. Activation status of the measure:

Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.
Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.
Test Pattern. Type of pattern used for the measure:

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
E1 Signal. Status of the E1 signal used for the measure:
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module
(116).
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.
2Mbit/s Selection. Tributary used for the measure.

Parameter meaningful only if the Enable option (E1 Signal parameter) is active.
Push-button
See also
PRBS (command)

Radio Loop & Cmd
Radio Link defined.
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Loop & Cmd command. For
the equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W
radio configuration are present the Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A (ODU A radio parameters) and Radio Loop
& Cmd ODU B (ODU B radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Loop & Cmd command manages the radio loops, the transmitter operating status, the RT PSU
operating status and the carrier modulation.
Operations
Verify the radio loops status
Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop
Execute the test (RF Loop)
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier
GUI
Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area
See also
Test RF Loop (info)
Verify the radio loops status
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd.

The Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.
WARNING The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic.

The activation of a radio loop ...(traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of the local and remote super-
vision.
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC:
The activation of a loop disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contex-
tual area).
The activation of a Loop IF... switches the remote transmitter off.
The activation of a Loop RF... can be disturbed by the cross-polarization signal.
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the
timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of
the equipment or the equipment reset.

2. In the Radio Loop area, select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
The presence of the box Test Loop Result indicates that the equipment is equipped with an ODU pro-
vided with Test RF (see Execute the test (RF Loop) and Test RF Loop (info).
3. Press Apply.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
2. In the Radio Loop area, select the Loop OFF option.

Operation available only for equipment provided with ODUs supporting the Test.
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.

2. Select the RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic squelched) or RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic not
squelched) option.
3. Press Apply.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm.
During the execution of the test, the Test Loop box shows the progression of the operation.
The status of the test is pointed out by the Test Loop Result box:
Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.
White box - wording Running. Test in progress.
Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).
Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).
Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.
Possible cause: the set timeout of the MAN OP is lower than the time for the execution of the
test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test.
5. Select the Loop OFF option.


WARNING Switching the power supply off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the power supply disabled the XPIC
Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply:
On. The RT power supply is on.
Off. The RT power supply is off.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the RT (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
WARNING Switching the transmitter off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the power supply disabled the XPIC
Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
On. The transmitter is turned on.
Off. The transmitter is turned off.
Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
WARNING Deactivating the modulation (option On) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
Before deactivating the modulation, configure the transmitter power to the minimum value.
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the modulation:
Disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).
Could cause interference in reception.

It is not advisable to perform the operation of Carrier Only on both branches. If it was however done, it
will be necessary to deactivate the operation for both the branches in rapid succession.

The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
On. The carrier is not modulated.
Off. The carrier is modulated.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.

Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area
For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration the Radio Loop & Cmd command is available
which opens the Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area.
For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0)
or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are the commands Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A (which opens the
context area Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A containing the radio parameters of ODU A) and Radio Loop & Cmd
ODU B (which opens the context area Radio Loop & Cmd ODU B containing the radio parameters of ODU
B).
The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops, the transmitter operating status, the RT
PSU operating status and the carrier modulation.
Parameters
RADIO LOOP
Loop. Status of the loops:
Loop OFF. No loop active.
RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic squelched). RF loop active: traffic (Ether-
net and TDM) is not looped.
IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not
looped.
RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic not squelched). RF loop active: traffic
(Ethernet and TDM) is looped.
IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is
looped.
The RF Loop... values are available only if the RF loop is supported by the equipment
hardware.
When the RF loop is not available, the values RF Loop (traffic squelched) and RF Loop
(traffic not squelched) are indicated.
Test Loop Result. Progress and result of Test RF:
Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.
White box - wording Running. Test in progress.
Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).
Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).
Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.
Parameter available only for equipment provided with ODUs supporting the Test RF.
RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply:

Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:

Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.
Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:
Push-button

See also
Radio Loop & Cmd (command)
Test RF Loop (info)

Test RF Loop (info)
The AGS-20 equipment with ODU of new generation is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality,
based on a loop executed in preset operating condition in such a way to verify the transceiver functionality.
The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need
any external measurement tools.
At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed: test executed correctly (ODU operating),
test failed (ODU faulted).
The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual oper-
ations.
If the timeout:
Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the
duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in
the specific procedure.
Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as de-
scribed in the specific procedure.
If the test is interrupted by the system, a possible reason could be that the set timeout was lower than the
execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of
the test.
In case of equipment wit Radio Link in:

1+1 Hot Standby radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch
involves the loss of the connection of the working branch, because the remote transmitter is
switched off.
1+1 Freq. Div radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch in-
volves the degradation or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on
this one the same modulation is (mandatory) set.

Manual Operations
The Manual Operations command manages the available maintenance operations (MAN OP).
Operations
Verify the manual operations status
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier
Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply
Activate/deactivate a radio loop
Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function
Force the management of the switching in reception
Force the management of the switching in transmission
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure
GUI
Manual Operations contextual area
Verify the manual operations status
1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.

The Manual Operations contextual area displays the current status of the available maintenance oper-
ations.
User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Ra-
dio Link defined.
Switching the transmitter off is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the Tx is on, independently from the previous set-
ting.
The permanent turn-off of the transmitter is not a maintenance operation, so the operation is not available
in this context. To execute it see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter.
For equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration, turn off the transmitter disables the XPIC fault
management procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:

2. To turn-off the transmitter select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.
3. To turn-on the transmitter select the On option, press Apply and confirm.
dio Link defined.
Deactivating the modulation of the RF carrier is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the time-
out setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the modulation:
Disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).
Could cause interference in reception.
It is not advisable to perform the operation of Carrier Only on both branches. If it was however done, it
will be necessary to deactivate the operation for both the branches in rapid succession.
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the
previous setting.

The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
2. To disable the modulation of the RF carrier select the On value, press Apply and confirm.
3. To enable the modulation of the RF carrier select the Off value, press Apply and confirm.
dio Link defined.
Switching the power supply off is a MAN. OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting
(see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
For equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration, turn off the RT power supply disables the XPIC
fault management procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently
from the previous setting.

The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply:
2. To turn-off the RT power supply select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.
3. To turn-on the RT power supply select the On option, press Apply and confirm.

dio Link defined.
The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/
modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the loop is deactive independently from the pre-
vious setting.
The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic.
The activation of the radio loop IF Loop (traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of the local and remote
supervision.
For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC:
The activation of a loop disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contex-
tual area).
The activation of a Loop IF... switches the remote transmitter off.

The Radio Loop parameter indicates the status of the radio loops:
IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not looped.
IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is looped.
2. To activate a loop select the value relevant to the wished loop, press Apply and confirm
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
3. To deactivate the loop select the Loop OFF value, press Apply and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration.
Disabling temporarily the XPIC function is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing
the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the XPIC function is active independently from the
previous setting.

The Xpic parameter indicates the status of the XPIC function:
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated.
2. To disable temporarily the XPIC function, select Disable, press Apply and confirm.
3. To restore the XPIC function, select Enable, press Apply and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with radio Link in 1+1 HS and 1+1 FD configuration.
Forcing the switch is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify
the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is auto-
matic independently from the previous setting.

The Rx Forced parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception for the specific Link:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the Link).
ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.
ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.
2. To force the management of the switching in reception, select ODU A or ODU B, press Apply and con-
firm.
3. To remove the forcing, select Auto, press Apply and confirm.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with radio Link in 1+1 HS configuration.
Forcing the switch is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify
the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is auto-
matic independently from the previous setting.

The Tx Forced parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission for the specific
Link:
functioning mode of the equipment).
ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.
ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.
2. To force the management of the switching in transmission, select ODU A or ODU B, press Apply and
confirm.
3. To remove the forcing, select Auto, press Apply and confirm.
WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout
setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from
the previous setting.

The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
2. To force the status of the T0 synchronisation select the Free Running or Hold Over value, press Apply
and confirm.
3. To remove the forcing select the Locked option, press Apply and confirm.

WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout
setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from
the previous setting.

The Forced Switch parameter indicates the forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of
the T0 synchronism:
Off. No source has been forced.
T3 SYNC. The system forces the use of the source extracted from RJ45 connector.
TE SyncE A. The system forces the use of the first source extracted from one of the Ethernet
LAN interfaces.
TE SyncE B. The system forces the use of the second source extracted from one of the Ethernet
LAN interfaces
T2 E1. The system forces the use of the source extracted from one of the E1 tributaries.
ODU/LAN A. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio A interface.
ODU/LAN B. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio B interface.
ODU/LAN C. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN
C.
ODU/LAN D. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN
D.
2. To force a source select the specific option, press Apply and confirm.
3. To remove the forcing select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.
WARNING Operation available for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/
modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops
are deactivated.
The activation of the loop on internal side is meaningful only if the relevant tributary is enabled (see Acti-
vate/deactivate the E1 use).

The PPI Loop area indicates, for every E1, the status of the relevant loop.
The first box indicates the loop status on line side: Line On (loop active), Line Off (loop inactive).
The second box indicates the loop status on internal side: Internal On (loop active), Internal Off (loop
inactive).
2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the wished option.


The Start/Stop parameter indicates the status of the PRBS measure.
2. To activate or reset the measure, select the Start-Reset option.
WARNING The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.

The Start/Stop parameter indicates the status of the PRBS measure.
2. To deactivate the measure, select the Stop option.
The activation of the E1 signal is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the E1
signal is deactivated.
The enabling of E1 signal is meaningful only if the PRBS parameters are configured and the measure is
active (see Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure/Activate/reset the
PRBS measure) and if the tributary set for the measure is enabled (see Activate/deactivate the E1 use).

The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (116).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.

Manual Operations contextual area
The contextual area shows the current status of the available maintenance operations (MAN OP).
Press to compress a group. Press to expand a group.
Parameters
ODU-A AND ODU B
Areas available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio
Link defined.
The area relevant to the second ODU is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0
XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration.
The following parameters are present in every area:
Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:
Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:
RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply:
Radio Loop. Status of the radio loops:
IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not
looped.
IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is
looped.
Xpic. Activation of XPIC function:
Disable. Function temporarily deactivated.
Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration.
RADIO SWITCH <RADIO LINK NAME>
Area available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1 HS and 1+1 FD configuration.
Rx Forced. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at reception between the service branch and the reserve one:
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the
alarms.
ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service
on the specific Link.
ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service
Tx Forced. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one:
alarms.
ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service
ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service
Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1 HS configuration.
SYNCHRONISATION
Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is gener-
ated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Forced Switch. Forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of the T0 syn-
chronism:
Off. No source has been forced.
T3 SYNC. The system forces the use of the source extracted from connector
RJ45.
TE SyncE A. The system forces the use of the first source extracted from one
of the Ethernet LAN interfaces.
TE SyncE B. The system forces the use of the second source extracted from
one of the Ethernet LAN interfaces.
T2 E1. The system forces the use of the source extracted from one of the E1
tributaries. Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
ODU/LAN A. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio
A interface.
ODU/LAN B. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio
B interface. Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).
ODU/LAN C. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ether-
net interface LAN C.
ODU/LAN D. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ether-
net interface LAN D.
PPI LOOP
Area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
<E1 name>. Name of the E1 tributary.
<first box>. Loop status on line side:
Line On. Line side loop active.
Line Off. Line side loop inactive.
<second box>. Loop status on internal side:
Internal On. Internal side loop active.
Internal Off. Internal side loop inactive.
PRBS
Area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).
E1 Signal. Status of the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure:
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM mod-
ule (116). The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates
also the connector (2Mbit/s tributary), which a measurement instrument can
be connected to for the control of the error rate by means of the PRBS func-
tionality.
Start/Stop. Activation status of the PRBS measure:
Start-Reset. The measure is active.
Stop. The measure is deactivated.
Push-button
See also
Manual Operations (command)


PSU Alarm Config.
The PSU Alarm Config. command manages the power supply alarms.
Operations
Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm
Enable/disable the PSU alarm
GUI
PSU Alarm Config. contextual area
Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm
1. Select Maintenance > PSU Alarm Config.

The PSU Alarm Config. contextual area displays the enabling status of power supply alarms.
WARNING The enabling of alarm PSU 1 and PSU 2 is subjected to the enabling status of the alarm pwrSup-
plyAlarm (IDU group) (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual area).
If the alarm pwrSupplyAlarm is disabled, even the alarms PSU 1 and PSU 2 will be disabled even if they
are set Enable in PSU Alarm Config. contextual area
If the alarm pwrSupplyAlarm is enabled, the alarms PSU 1 and PSU 2 will be enabled or disabled depending
on what set in the context area PSU Alarm Config.
1. Select Maintenance > PSU Alarm Config.
2. Set the PSU 1 Alarm parameter (first Power Supply module alarm) or PSU 2 Alarm parameter (second
Power Supply module alarm) selecting:
Enable, to enable the alarm.
Enabling the alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected, this is registered
in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Se-
verity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and dis-
played in the current alarms and the history alarms.
Disable, to disable the alarm.
Disabling the alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management pro-
gram: as the alarm had never occurred.
For equipment type AGS-20 Switch, AGS-20 Single-IF, AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1 is available and mean-
ingful only the PSU 1 Alarm parameter.

PSU Alarm Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the enabling status of power supply alarms.
Parameters
PSU 1 Alarm. Enabling status of the alarm relevant to the first module Power Supply:
Enable. Alarm enabled.
Disable. Alarm disabled.
PSU 2 Alarm. Enabling status of the alarm relevant to the second module Power Supply:
Enable. Alarm enabled.
Disable. Alarm disabled.
Parameter not available and meaningful for equipment type AGS-20 Switch, AGS-20 Single-IF,
AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1.
Push-button
See also
PSU Alarm Config. (command)

Radio Switch
WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in 1+1
configuration.
<Radio Link name>. It manages the switch of the specific Radio Link.

<Radio Link name>
WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in
1+1 configuration.
The <Radio Link name> command manages the switch of the specific Radio Link.
Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
Modify the Wait Time parameter
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
GUI
<Radio Link name> contextual area
See also
Radio switch (info)
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > <Radio Link name>.

The <Radio Link name> contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the
radio switch of the specific Link.

The Rx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception for the specific
Link.

functioning mode of the Link).
Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the spe-
cific Link.
Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the spe-
cific Link.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Ch option) a message warns that you are exe-
cuting a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then switched
on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting.

WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequen-
tial type (1+1 Hot Standby).
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

The Tx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission for the spe-
cific Link.

functioning mode of the equipment).
Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the spe-
cific Link.
Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the spe-
cific Link.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Ch option) a message warns that you are exe-
cuting a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then switched
on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting.
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequen-
tial type (1+1 Hot Standby).

The Tx Preferential parameter indicates the management of the preferential branch in transmission for
the specific Link.

Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Ch 1 (ODU A). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use
the branch 1 (ODU A).
Ch 2 (ODU B). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use
the branch 2 (ODU B).
WARNING Operation available only if set a preferential branch the service at transmission (see Tx Prefer-
ential).

The Wait Time (m) parameter indicates the value of Wait Time.
2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 minutes.

Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
WARNING Operation available only if set a preferential branch the service at transmission (see Tx Prefer-
ential).
2. Press Reset and confirm

<Radio Link name> contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link
in 1+1 configuration.
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration of the radio switch of the specific Link.
Parameters
Rx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at reception between the service branch and the reserve one:
alarms.
Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service
Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service
Tx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching
at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one:
alarms.
Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service
Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service
PREFERENTIAL MANAGEMENT
Tx Preferential. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the func-
tion of preferential branch for the service at transmission:
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equip-
ment does not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other
one.
Ch 1 (ODU A). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the
equipment use the branch 1 (ODU A).
Ch 2 (ODU B). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the
equipment use the branch 2 (ODU B).
Wait Time (m). Time period during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the con-
tinue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
WARNING Tx Forced Switch, Tx Preferential and Wait Time parameters are available only for
equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type (1+1 Hot Standby).
For Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type (1+1 Frequency Diversity),
the parameters are not available because the two branches (ODU A and ODU B) transmit at the
same time because the selection of the signal is executed at reception.
Push-button
Reset. Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
See also
<Radio Link name> (command)
Radio switch (info)

Radio switch (info)
Management of the radio switch

The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the AGS-20 equipment with Radio Link in
protected configuration, generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch
when specific alarms raises on the operating radio branch (ODU).
The user can manage the radio switch executing some forcing operations and enabling the pref-
erential branch.
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)

This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms
which can be active on Link (see Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx
Forced Switch)/Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or
transmission. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates
it or the timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)

This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission
when there are not alarms that cause the switching on Link (see Modify the preferential branch
for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential).
When the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when
on the branch on service there are present some specific alarms.
When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While,
if it has been set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on
service is not the preferential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the ser-
vice the branch set by the operator as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have
any alarms).
Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-
preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the
continue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferen-
tial branch to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immedi-
ately restored to service but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the
controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the
end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not occurred again, the service is restored to the
preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other n seconds, during which the con-
troller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the user can Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the
Wait Time expiration.

RMON
Settings. It manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History).
Ethernet Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).
Ethernet Service Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances
Port & Priority and Port & VLAN).
Ethernet History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances per Port).
Ethernet Service History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances Port & Priority
and Port & VLAN).

Settings
The Settings command manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History).
Operations
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics
Activate the count of the RMon statistics
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics
STATISTICS GROUP
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics
HISTORY GROUP
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON
statistics
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the
RMON statistics
GUI
Settings contextual area
See also
RMon standard (info)
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

The parameter RMON Status shows the status of the count of the RMon statistics and the history of the
RMon statistics for the all enabled instances:
Enabled. The count is active.
Disabled. The count is not active.
WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance has been set.
2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Enabled and confirm.

The count of the RMon statistics is activated for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab,
Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.

WARNING The operation resets the current values of RMON statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and
Ethernet Service Statistics) and the RMon statistic history (see Ethernet History and Ethernet Service His-
tory).
2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Disabled and confirm.

The count of the RMon statistics is interrupted for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab,
Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics
WARNING The recommended maximum number of RMon instances per Port is 10.
2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, press Add.
3. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of RMon
statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in list or in the tab Ethernet Service Statistics tab.
4. Set, in the Data source box, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the RMon statistics
for the specific instance.
The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
The list will display only the ports not associated yet to any RMon per Port instance.
5. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric
string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.
6. Press Apply.
The instance is added to the list.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for
the count of the RMon statistics).
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics
WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, select the instance you wish to delete.
An instance per Port cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the same Ethernet port is present
in the Ethernet History tab. To delete it, it is first necessary to remove the instance per Port present in
the tab Ethernet History.

The instance is deleted from the list.
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics
WARNING The recommended maximum number of RMon instance for service (instances Port & Priority +
instances Port & VLAN) is 64. Within this limit, a maximum number of 40 instances Port & VLAN is foresee.
2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the port in the database table of RMon sta-
tistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Statistics tab.
5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable to the count of RMon statistics for
the specific instance.
6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the port (alphanumeric string
of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.
7. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to enable to filter the traffic:
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output must have to be
counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge
modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be
counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.
8. Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to
be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service.

9. Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics.
The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service.
10.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service.
11.Press Apply.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority
or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics).
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics
2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab.
3. Select the instance you wish to delete.

An instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the same cri-
teria (Ethernet port and Priority or C-VID/S-VID) is present in the Ethernet Service History tab. In order
to delete it, it is first necessary to delete the corresponding instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN pre-
sent in the tab Ethernet Service History.

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics
WARNING The total recommended maximum number of RMon instances for the count of the RMon statistics
history is 74. The limit is for instances of 1 minute and 240 buckets.
2. Select the Ethernet History tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Service History tab.
5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the
RMon statistics for the specific instance.

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the RMon instance (alphanu-
meric string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.
7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240).
The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the
old one.
8. Set, in Persistence box, the status of automatic storing of RMon statistics:

Disable. Automatic storing inactive.
Enable. Automatic storing active.
9. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history.
If, in the previous step, the parameter Persistence has been set to:
Disable, any value can be set, between 1 and 3600 seconds, as sampling interval.
Enable, one of the following values can be set: 60, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1800 or 3600 seconds.
The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds.
10.Press Apply.
The message Ethernet Statistics for <port name> are not present, they will be created automatically?
indicates that, for the Ethernet port selected at step 5, there is not an analogous instance in the Ether-
net Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for
the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
In the Ethernet Statistics tab, an instance per Port is automatically created with the following charac-
teristics:
Index. First value Index free in the table of the current RMon statistics of the database.
Data Source and Owner. Respectively Ethernet port and user of the instance per Port just cre-
ated for the count of the RMon statistics.
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
2. Select the Ethernet History tab.


Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON sta-
tistics
WARNING The total recommended maximum number of RMon instances for the count of the RMon statistics
history is 74. The limit is for instances of 1 minute and 240 buckets.

2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in Ethernet History tab.
5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the
RMon statistics for the specific instance.
6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric
string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.
7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240).
The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the
old one.
The recommended maximum value of bucket for all the instances is 2400.
8. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history.
If, in the previous step, the parameter Persistence has been set to:
Disable, any value can be set, between 1 and 3600 seconds, as sampling interval.
Enable, one of the following values can be set: 60, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1800 or 3600 seconds.
The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds.
9. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to use to filter the traffic:
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port must
have to be counted in the history of the RMON statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have
to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge
modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must
have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.
10.Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to
be counted in the history of the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service.
11.Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
in the history of the RMon statistics.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service.
12.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
in the history of the RMon statistics.

Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service.
13.Press Apply.
The message Ethernet Service Statistics for <nome porta> with <priority or identifier> is not present,
will be created? indicates that, for the selected Ethernet port and priority or C-VIS/S-VID there is not
an analogous instance in the Ethernet Service Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority
or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
In the tab Ethernet Service Statistics, an instance is automatically created with the following charac-
teristics:
Index. First value Index free in the table of the history of RMon statistics of the database.
Data Source, Owner, Priority or C-VID/S-VID. Respectively Ethernet port, user, priority or VLAN
identifier of the instance just created for the count of the history of RMon statistics.
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON
statistics
2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab.


Settings contextual area
This contextual area shows the status and RMon instances enabled for the count of the RMon statistics
(group Statistics and History).
Tab
Ethernet Statistics tab. RMon instances per Port (Statistics group).
Ethernet History tab. RMon instances per Port (History group).
Ethernet Service Statistics tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN (Statistics
group).
Ethernet Service History tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN (History group).
Parameters
RMON Status. Status of the count of the statistics and of the history of the statistics for all the
RMon instance set by the user:
Enabled. The count is active.
Disabled. The count is not active.
Push-button
See also
Settings (command)
Ethernet Statistics tab
The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics).
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated:
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the
RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the instance.

Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip di-
rected upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed
with the tip directed downwards) and so on.
Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the
table with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Command available only for Index column.
Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of
the table with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics
Ethernet History tab
The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the history of the RMon statistics
(group History).
Table
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the RMon instance in the database table
of history of RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the
count of the RMon statistics history is associated to.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance.
Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these
data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one.
Persistence. Status of automatic storing of RMon statistics:
Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics his-
tory.

Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the
table with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of
the table with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Ethernet Service Statistics tab
The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN enabled for the count of the RMon sta-
tistics (group Statistics).
Table
RMon statistics.
Data source.Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the port.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in
Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Customer Bridge modality.
Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon sta-
tistics

Ethernet Service History tab
The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN enabled for the count of the history of
the RMon statistics (group History).
Table
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of his-
tory of RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the history of RMon
statistics for the specific instance.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance.
Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these
data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one.
Persistence. Status of automatic storing of RMon statistics:
Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics his-
tory.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON
statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of
the RMON statistics

RMon Standard
RMon (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics
count, monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in
the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which
must be read for any further detail.
Outline on the operation

RMon standard is based on two components: an agent (RMon probe) and a client (remote man-
agement station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMon tables present on the network devices (equip-
ment, routers, etc.). The RMon probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves.
The remote management station communicates with the RMon agent to obtain and correlate the
RMon data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows
the display and the analysis of the collected RMon data.
Management from Web LCT

The Rmon functionality available in WEB LCT allows monitoring the status of the Ethernet Switch
ports in compliance with the RMON standard.
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality acts as client
which, through the commands present in the GUI, allows the analysis and the management of
the data collected by the probes.
The probes are present at level of:
Port (line/radio) of the Ethernet Switch (RMon instance per Port). This instance allows
monitoring all the traffic in input/output to/from one port of the Ethernet Switch.
VLAN (RMon instance Port & VLAN). This instance allows monitoring only the traffic in
input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given VLAN identifier (C-VID or S-VID ac-
cording to the Bridge operating modality).
Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority). This instance allows monitoring only the traffic
in input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given priority value (Internal Priority).
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMon table of the equipment.
Currently, the equipment implements the RMON MIB groups Statistics and History.
RMON MIB group: Statistics

Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the current statistics measured by
the RMon probes (see Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per
Port) and Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and
Port & VLAN).
To display the counters of an instance, it is necessary to enable the involved instance (see Set
a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and Set a RMon instance Port &
Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics) and then activate the counting (see
Activate the count of the RMon statistics).
The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count
of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count
of the RMon statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count
of the RMon statistics.
RMON MIB group: History

Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the evolution in time (history) of
the statistics relevant to the counters in input/output of every monitored probes (see Display
the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) and Display the history of the RMon
statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN).
At equipment level, the value of the counters of the RMon probes is stored in the statistics his-
tory every x seconds (sampling interval) for a total number of samples to take programmable
from 1 to 240. The equipment stores these data into a circular buffer where, when full, the new
information replaces the old one.

In order to memorize in the database and display the statistics history of one instance, it is nec-
essary to activate the instance (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of
the RMON statistics and Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the
history of the RMON statistics) and then activate the count (see Activate the count of the RMon
statistics).
The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count
of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count
of the history of the RMON statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN
for the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
When an instance is activated, the supervision system starts memorizing the data relevant to
the statistics and makes them available to the user, in table format, subdivided for single RMon
instance.
When an instance is created, it is possible to set if the data must be automatically stored or not
(parameter Persistence). The storing modes are described here below.
Limits
Tab.10 RMon instances limits
STATISTICS HISTORY
Counters
(current counters) (stored counters)
per Port & per Port & per Port & per Port &
Instances per Port per Port
Priority VLAN Priority VLAN
74 74
Recommended
from 1 minutes
limits 10 64 40 from 240 bucket each
WARNING If the number of created instances is the recommended one or lower, but the pro-
cessing requires a time greater than that defined in ones browser for the script processing, the
WEB LCT page displays a warning window.
The window contains the buttons to continue the script processing or to stop it (see the docu-
mentation relevant to ones browser).
In this case, the use of CLI interface (application SM-OS) to display the counters or the enabling
of the Persistance function (automatic archive of RMon statistics) and the export via FTP of the
results on CSV file are suggested.
See also
Settings (command)
Ethernet Statistics (command)
Ethernet Service Statistics (command)
Ethernet History (command)
Ethernet Service History (command)

Ethernet Statistics
The command Ethernet Statistics displays the current values of the RMon statistic.
The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port).
Operations
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port)
GUI
Ethernet Statistics contextual area
See also
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port)
WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one Ethernet port is enabled for the count and if the count
of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Statistics.

The Ethernet Statistics contextual area displays the value of the RMon counters for every RMon instance
per Port.

Ethernet Statistics contextual area
The contextual area displays the current values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).
Table
Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance:
RMon statistics.
Owner. User who has enabled the instance.
The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.11).
<Ethernet port>. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of RMon statistics for the
specific RMon instance per Port.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number)
followed by the port name:
Every port (RMon instance) corresponds to a column where the results of the relevant RMon
counters are displayed.
Push-button
Help. Open the help on line.
Refresh. Update the table of counters.
See also
Ethernet Statistics (command)

Tab.11 RMon counters (Ethernet Statistics - RMon instance per Port)

Counter 64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets FCS
Description (Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet) *
Drop Events - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of dropped packets **
- - - - - - - - - KO
Octets x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received octets
Pkts x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received packets
BroadcastPkts - - - - - - - x - OK
Number of packets received directed to the broadcast ad-
dresses - - - - - - - - - KO
MulticastPkts - - - - - - - - x OK
Number of packets received directed to a multicast addresses
- - - - - - - - - KO
UndersizePkts x x x - - - - - - OK
Number of Undersize packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO
OversizePkts - - - x x x - - - OK
Number of Oversize packets received
- - - x x x - - - KO
Fragments - - - - - - - - - OK
x x x - - - - - - KO
CRC Align Errors - - - - - - - - - OK

Number of Good and Oversize packets received
- - - x x x x x x KO
Pkts 64 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK
Number of packets transmitted/received with 64 octets in
length - - - - - - x x x KO
Pkts 65 to 127 - - - - - - x x x OK
Number of packets transmitted/received with length between
65 and 127 octets - - - - - - x x x KO
Pkts 128 to 255 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK

128 and 255 octet) - - - - - - x x x KO

256 and 511 octets - - - - - - x x x KO

512 and 1023 octets - - - - - - x x x KO
Pkts > 1024 Octets - - - x x x x x x OK

Number of packets transmitted/received with length equal to
or greater than 1024 octets - - - x x x x x x KO
x Counter incremented. - Counter not incremented.

** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily
the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other rea-
sons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

Ethernet Service Statistics
The command Ethernet Service Statistics displays the current values of RMon statistic counters.
The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and the packet characteristics: value of
User Priority (RMon instances Port & Priority) or C-TAG identifier or S-TAG identifier (RMon instances Port
& VLAN).
Operations
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port &
VLAN)
GUI
Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area
See also
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port &
VLAN)
WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is enabled for the count and if the count
of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the
RMon statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics).
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service Statistics.

The Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area displays the value of RMon counters for every RMon
instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN.

Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area
The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and
Port & VLAN).
Table
Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance:
RMon statistics.
Owner. User who has enabled the RMon instance.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the
port must have to be counted in the RMon statistics.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is
in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the
port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is
in Customer Bridge modality.
<Ethernet port>. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics for
the specific RMon instances.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number)
followed by the port name:
Every RMon instance corresponds to one column where are indicated the characteristics of the
instance and the results of the relevant RMon counters.
Push-button
Refresh. Update the table of counters.
See also
Ethernet Service Statistics (command)

Tab.12 RMon counters (Ethernet Service Statistics and Ethernet Service History - RMon instanc-
es Port & Priority e Port & VLAN)
WARNING The counters per service (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) include even frames
received with wrong FCS or frames too long. The condition can be checked using the counters per port
(RMon instances per Port).
Packets (Tagged or Packet (Tagged or Packet (Tagged or

Untagged) with Untagged) with Untagged) with
length lower than length longer than n length between 64
Counter 64 octects (MTU value) octets and n (MTU value) oc- FCS *
Description (Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) tets (Good packet)

Received Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of Good and Oversize packets received
Sent Pkts - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted packets
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Octects - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of received octets
Sent Octects - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted octets
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Discard Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due
to forbidden forwarding or policing violation. - - - x x x x x x KO
Sent Discard Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK

Total number of outbound packets which were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to pre-
vent their being transmitted. Possible reasons for discard- - - - - - - - - - KO
ing such a packet could buffer space lack due to output
shaping, rate limitation or egress MTU exceeded.
Received Unicast Pkts - - - x - - x - - OK
Total number of inbound Unicast packets
- - - x - - x - - KO
Sent Unicast Pkts - - - - - - x - - OK

Total number of outbound Unicast packets
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Not Unicast Pkts - - - - x x - x x OK

Total number of inbound Non-Unicast packets
- - - - x x - x x KO
Sent Not Unicast Pkts - - - - - - - x x OK

Total number of outbound Non-Unicast packets
- - - - - - - - - KO


Ethernet History
The command Ethernet History displays the history of the RMon statistics.
The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port).
Operations
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
GUI
Ethernet History contextual area
See also
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon
statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics and
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History.

The Ethernet History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all instances per Port.
In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History.
2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (indexes) for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling
interval in table.
To activate an index, port or user, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant
box ( ).
It is possible to activate more indexes/ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the
records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users.
3. Press Apply Filter.
4. To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users,
press Remove Filter.

Ethernet History contextual area
The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).
Table
Every line of the table corresponds to a sampling interval of an instance for which is indicated:
Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every
sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected.
Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of
the statistics history is associated to.
Parameters
FILTERING
Criteria available to filter the sampling interval in the table. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table
of history of RMon statistics).
Source. Ports of the Switch.
Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances.
For every criterion, the active box ( ) indicates that the table contains sampling intervals
matching the specific criterion. The inactive box ( ) indicates that the table contains no sam-
pling interval matching the specific criterion.
Push-button
Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
See also
Ethernet History (command)

Tab.13 RMon counters (Ethernet History - RMon instance per Port)

Description
Drop Events - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of dropped packets **
- - - - - - - - - KO
Octets x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received octets
Pkts x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received packets
BroadcastPkts - - - - - - - x - OK
Number of packets received directed to the broadcast ad-
dresses - - - - - - - - - KO
MulticastPkts - - - - - - - - x OK
Number of packets received directed to a multicast ad-
dresses - - - - - - - - - KO
UndersizePkts x x x - - - - - - OK
- - - - - - - - - KO
OversizePkts - - - x x x - - - OK
Number of Oversize packets received
- - - x x x - - - KO
Fragments - - - - - - - - - OK
x x x - - - - - - KO
CRC Align Errors - - - - - - - - - OK

Number of Good and Oversize packets received
Utilization (%)
Estimate (expressed in percentage) of the average use of
the port during the sampling interval.
The percentage of use refers to the line rate of the associ- - - - - - - - - - -
ated porta.
The percentage of use of the radio port refers to the rate
of 2.5 Gbps

** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily
the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other rea-
sons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

Ethernet Service History
The command Ethernet Service History displays the history of the RMon statistics.
The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and to the characteristics of the packet:
value of User Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority) or C-TAG or S-TAG identifier (RMon instance Port &
VLAN).
Operations
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN)
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN)
GUI
Ethernet Service History contextual area
See also
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN)
WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon
statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of
the RMON statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics).
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History.

The Ethernet Service History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all Port & Priority
and Port & VLAN instances.
In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and
Port & VLAN) according to different criteria.
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN)
1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History.
2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (indexes) for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling
interval in table.
To activate an index, port or user, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant
box ( ).
It is possible to activate more indexes/ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the
records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users.
3. Press Apply Filter.
4. To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users,
press Remove Filter.

Ethernet Service History contextual area
The contextual area displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port &
VLAN).
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one sampling interval of one instance for which is indicat-
ed:
Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every
sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected.
Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of
the statistics history is associated to.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
Parameters
FILTERING
Criteria available to filter the sampling interval in the table. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table
of history of RMon statistics).
Source. Ports of the Switch.
Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances.
For every criterion, the active box ( ) indicates that the table contains sampling intervals
matching the specific criterion. The inactive box ( ) indicates that the table contains no sam-
pling interval matching the specific criterion.

Push-button
Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority
and Port & VLAN)
See also
Ethernet Service History (command)

ALARM IN/OUT
Alarm Input. It manages the User Input (local and remote).

Alarm Output. It manages the User Output.

Alarm Input
The Alarm Input command manages the configuration of the local User Input and remote User Input.
Operations
Verify the User Input status and configuration
Modify the name of an User Input
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input
GUI
Alarm Input contextual area
See also
User Input (info)
1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Input.

The Alarm Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local and remote User In-
puts.

The Label column displays the name of the User Inputs.
2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string
of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
WARNING It is not possible to modify the rest condition of one remote user input. The rest condition is set
only locally.

The Input Operation column shows the rest condition of the local User Inputs.
2. To change the rest condition of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:
Normally Open. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.

Normally Close. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.

The Severity column shows the status/severity of the User Inputs alarms.
2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value:
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.
Status, to:
Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Minor level.
Major, to:
Major level.
Critical, to:
Critical level.

The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local and remote User Inputs.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input for which are indicated:
Label. User Input name.
Status. User Input status:
Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.
Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.
Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity
level.
Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.
Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.
Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.
Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input:
Disable. The alarm is disabled.
Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respec-
tively of level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Input Operation. Rest condition of the User Input:
Normally Open. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is re-
ferred to ground.
Normally Close. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is open.
Parameter available only for the local User Input.
Side. User Input type:
Local. Local User Input.
Remote. Remote User Input.
Push-button
See also
Alarm Input (command)
User Input (info)

User Input (info)
The User Input (UI) is a signal in input to the local equipment through the connector ALARM and whose
status is reported as alarm event or status signal to the management program (e.g. WEB LCT).
The signal can even be associated to one User Output to forward to outside the alarm condition associated
to the UI.
The User Inputs can be distinguished into local User Inputs and remote User Input.
Local User Input

The local User Inputs are signals which directly enter into the local equipment and whose status
(open or closed) can be set.
Remote User Input

The remote User Inputs are signal which enter into the remote equipment, are delivered outside
of the remote equipment (User Output) and forwarded to the local equipment. For these signals,
the rest condition cannot be locally set because they inherit the condition assigned in the remote
equipment.
User Input alarm

The alarm condition associated to a local or remote User Input locale (User Input alarm) can be
enabled or disabled.
Disabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in
the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management
program: as the alarm has never occurred.
On the other hand, enabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this
is recorded in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which
displays it in the current alarms and in the alarm history.
See also
Alarm Input (command)

Alarm Output
The Alarm Output command manages the User Output configuration.
Operations
Verify the User Output status and configuration
Modify the name of an User Output
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output
Force the User Output activation
Remove the forcing of the User Output
GUI
Alarm Output contextual area
See also
User Output (info)
1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output.

The Alarm Output contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.

The Label column shows the name of the User Outputs.
2. To modify the name of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.

The Active Status column shows the operating modality of the relay contacts of the User Output.
2. To modify the parameter, double click on the relevant box and select the option:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

User Profile | Very: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.
2. Press Change in the Alarms Binding box.

The Mapping window lists the alarms and the User Inputs of the equipment.
For every alarm, the column Alarm displays the name and the column Group displays the group which
the alarm belongs to (see Tab.14).
The active box ( ) indicates that the alarm is associated to the User Output; the inactive box indicates
that the alarm is not associated.
Activating the option Show only checked item(s), the list will be filtered displaying only the alarms
whose box is active.
3. Activate or deactivate the boxes relevant to the alarms or to the User Input (Alarm Input) you wish to
associate to the User Output.
2. Double click on the Force box and select the Forced option.

The User Output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing.
2. Double click on the Force box and select the Unforced option.

The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.
Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one User Output for which are indicated:
Label. User Output name.
Status. User Output status:
Inactive (green box). User Output not activated.
Active (red box). User Output activated (relay contacts activated).
Active (Forced) (red box). User Output is active after the forcing by operator.
Alarms Binding. User Output setting:
Unbound. No signal is associated to User Output.
Bound. One or more signals are associated to User Output (group of alarms
and/or User Input). Press Change to verify the signals.
Active State. Functioning mode of the relay contacts:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the re-
lays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts
are open
Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the
relays contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts
are closed.
Force. Status of the forcing of the User Output:
Unforced. User Output is not active after the forcing by the operator.
Forced. User Output is active after the forcing by operator.
Push-button
Refresh status. Update the User Output status.
Change. Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output.
See also
Alarm Output (command)
User Output (info)

User Output (info)
The User Output is a signal which the local equipment makes available outside, through the connector
ALARM, to forward alarms.
One or more equipment alarms and/or alarms coming from outside (User Input) can be associated to an
User Output.
In this way, when at least one of the alarms associated to the User Output becomes active, the alarm con-
dition will be signalled outside by the activation of the User Output.
See also
Alarm Output (command)

ALARMS LIST
Tab.14 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment.

The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment.
Equipment
COMMON
ETH LAN
IDU
P.M. ACM
P.M. G.828
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
Plug-in module
Queue Depth
RADIO
SETS
UNIT
For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the GUI and the
wording present in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm dis-
played in the Events area, represent a variable.
The symbol -means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area.

Tab.14 - Alarms list
Events area Alarm Severity Config. alarms
Equipment
Alarm Input <label> alarmInput
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning -
COMMON
Equip Manual Operation equipManualOperation
NMS Wake Up Alarm equipManagerWakeUpAlarm
ETH LAN
<LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN-4, LAN-5, LAN-6, ODU/LAN A, ODU/LAN B, ODU/LAN C, ODU/ ifextLosAlarm
LAN D> Loss of Signal Alarm
IDU
Local IDU Alarm Synthesis linkLocalIduAlarmSynthesis
<radio branch> Modulator Fail Alarm radioModulatorFailAlarm
<radio branch> Demodulator Fail Alarm radioDemodulatorFailAlarm
<radio branch> Remote Demodulator Fail Alarm radioRemDemodulatorFailAlarm
<radio branch> IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm radioCableOpenAlarm
<radio branch> IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm radioCableShortAlarm
Local IDU Alarm Synthesis linkLocalIduAlarmSynthesis
IDU Board Trib. #<E1 number> (<E1 name>) signal loss Alarm ppiLosAlarm
IDU Board Trib. #<E1 number> (<E1 name>) AIS Alarm ppiRxAisAlarm
IDU Board Trib. #<E1 number> (<E1 name>) synchronisation Alarm ppiE1SyncAlarm
PRBS Fail Alarm ppiPrbsFailAlarm
<LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4, LAN 5, LAN 6, ODU/LAN A, ODU/LAN B, ODU/LAN C, ODU/LAN llfAlarm
D> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm
POE <LAN A, LAN B> Zero Current Alarm poeZeroCurrentAlarm
POE <LAN A, LAN B> Over Current Alarm poeOverCurrentAlarm

<PSU name> Power Supply Alarm pwrSupplyAlarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM <Radio Link name> 15M counter <1=unavail., 2=downshift, 3=upshift, 6=4QAMS, acmsTpProfile15mAlarm
7=4QAM, 10=16QAMS, 11=16QAM, 13=32QAM, 15=64QAM, 17=128QAM, 19=256QAM,
20=512QAMS, 21=512QAM, 22=1024QAMS, 23=1024QAM, 25=2048QAM> threshold cross
Alarm
P.M. ACM <Radio Link name> 24H counter <1=unavail., 2=downshift, 3=upshift, 6=4QAMS, acmsTpProfile24HAlarm
7=4QAM, 10=16QAMS, 11=16QAM, 13=32QAM, 15=64QAM, 17=128QAM, 19=256QAM,
20=512QAMS, 21=512QAM, 22=1024QAMS, 23=1024QAM, 25=2048QAM> threshold cross
Alarm

P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 15M counter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 15M counter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 15M counter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 24H counter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 24H counter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> 24H counter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm
P.M. G.828 <radio branch> UAS Alarm pmG828-UASAlarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RxPower <radio branch> 15M counter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm
P.M. RxPower <radio branch> 15M counter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts2Alarm
P.M. RxPower <radio branch> 24H counter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm
P.M. RxPower <radio branch> 24H counter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. TxPower <radio branch> 15M counter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm
P.M. TxPower <radio branch> 15M counter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm
P.M. TxPower <radio branch> 24H counter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm
P.M. TxPower <radio branch> 24H counter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm
Plug-in module
<LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 5, LAN 6, ODU/LAN C, ODU/LAN D> Plug-in module Fail Alarm plug-inModuleAlarm
Queue Depth
Queue Depth Profile Mismatch Alarm qdProfileMismatchAlarm
RADIO
<radio branch> Invalid Frequency Alarm radioInvalidFrequencyAlarm
<radio branch> Rx Power Low Alarm radioRxPowerLowAlarm
<radio branch> Tx Power Alarm radioTxPowerAlarm
<radio branch> Vco Fail Alarm radioRtVcoFail

<radio branch> Rx AGC Alarm radioRxAGCAlarm
<radio branch> Tx AGC Alarm radioTxAGCAlarm
<radio branch> IDU ODU Communication Alarm radioIduOduCommunicationAlarm
<radio branch> ODU IDU Communication Alarm radioOduIduCommunicationAlarm
<radio branch> Local alarm synthesis radioLocalOduAlarmSynthesis
<radio branch> Remote alarm synthesis radioRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis
<radio branch> Configuration parameter Mismatch Alarm radioConfigMismatch
<radio branch> Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm radioRxQualityLowAlarm
<radio branch> Radio Rx Quality Warning Alarm radioRxQualityWarningAlarm
<radio branch> Rx Active Status radioRxActiveStatus
<radio branch> Tx Active Status radioTxActiveStatus
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Telemetry Fail Alarm linkLinkTelemetryFailAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification linkReducedCapacityAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> ID Alarm linkIdAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Radio EOC Alarm linkRadioEocAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Setup Mismatch Alarm linkSetupMismatchAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Rescue Modulation Setup Alarm linkRescueSetupAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> FMP: Xpic disable linkXpicProcedureBlockAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request linkXpicRemTxOffAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Remote IDU Alarm Synthesis linkRemoteIduAlarmSynthesis
Radio Branches <radio branch> No Matching Radios Parameters linkNoMatchingRadiosAlarm
Radio Link <Radio Link name> Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER linkTfcAlarm
L1 Aggregation <Port ODU A, Port ODU C> Fail Alarm aggrL1FailAlarm
L1 Aggregation <Port ODU A, Port ODU C> Degrade Alarm aggrL1DegradeAlarm

L1 Aggregation <Port ODU A, Port ODU C> Realignment Alarm aggrL1RealignmentAlarm
SETS
BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> Active Status timingSynkActiveStatus
BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> Drift Alarm timingSynkDriftAlarm
BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> LTI Alarm timingSynkLossAlarm
BASE BAND Sets Free Running Status timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus
BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm
BASE BAND Sets T4 Squelch Alarm timingGeneratorT4SquelchAlarm
BASE BAND Sets Active Status timingGeneratorActiveStatus
UNIT
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm unitFailAlarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm unitMissingAlarm

<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm unitNotRespondingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm unitHwMismatchAlarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm unitSwMismatchAlarm

Temperature threshold 1 exceeded Alarm tempSensorAlarmThreshold1
Temperature threshold 2 exceeded Alarm tempSensorAlarmThreshold2
Fans Alarm fansAlarm

OPERATIONS LIST
A
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................125
Alarms
Change the severity of an alarm ........................................................................................... 79
Delete the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................. 59
Enable/disable an alarm ...................................................................................................... 78
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .............................................................. 78
Save the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................... 58
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ......................................... 78
ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................240
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................241
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................241
Range of the ATPC regulation, verify/modify .........................................................................241
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile, display ......242
B
Basic configuration of the equipment, verify ................................................................................ 37
Bridge Mode
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ......................................................................139
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .......................................................................139
C
Communication protocol
Enable/disable the administrative status of a communication protocol .......................................109
Verify the operating status of the communication protocols .....................................................109
D
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................. 59
Duplexer frequency, verify/modify ............................................................................................239

E
E1
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..........................................................................................209
Activate/deactivate the E1 use ............................................................................................208
Modify the label of an E1 ....................................................................................................208
Modify the management status of LOS alarm ........................................................................209
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ........................................................................208
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................................... 38
Equipment configuration
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of
configuration restore (configuration revert) ............................................................................ 74
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ............................................... 73
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ........................... 74
Equipment firmware
Switch the memory benches ................................................................................................ 67
Equipment identifier, modify ..................................................................................................... 37
Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 38
Equipment software reset .................................................................................................... 37, 68
Equipment software/firmware
Update .............................................................................................................................. 66
Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 66
Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 39
Ethernet ports
Activate the loop on line side of a port ..................................................................................142
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ..............................................................................142
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port ....................................................142
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ..................................................................................144
Modify the enabling status of a port .....................................................................................142
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port .....................................................143
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports ...........................................143
Modify the transmission speed of a port ................................................................................143
Modify the type of interface ................................................................................................141
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port ...................................................................143
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration ......................................................................... 141, 144
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .......................................................144
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its
priority (User Priority) ........................................................................................................145
Execute the test (RF Loop) ......................................................................................................252

H
Header Compression
Enable/disable the functionality ...........................................................................................165
Verify the status of the functionality .....................................................................................165
Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets ....................165
Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets ...........................166
HTTPS
Download the SSL certificate in an equipment .......................................................................112
Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment .....................................................112
Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment .......................................................111
Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol ...........................................................................111
I
IP address of the agent SNMP, modify ........................................................................................ 37
L
LAN
Modify the operating mode of line synchronism (role) of the LANs, verify/modify .......................223
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................128
LLF
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality .......................................................181
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ..........................182
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio .........................................................183
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ............................................184
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ........................................................................183
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality ...............................................................183
Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm ........................................................................184
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality ....................................182
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ......................182
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ................................................181
Local User
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................303
Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................127
M
MAN OP
Activate/deactivate a radio loop ..........................................................................................260

Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..........................................................................................262
Activate/reset the PRBS measure ........................................................................................263
Deactivate the PRBS measure .............................................................................................263
Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function .......................................................................260
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .....................................................................259
Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply ..............................................................259
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure .........................................................263
Force the management of the switching in reception ..............................................................260
Force the management of the switching in transmission ..........................................................261
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................261
Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................262
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..........................................................................................258
Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 33
Verify the manual operations status .....................................................................................258
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 33
MNGT port
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port ............................................200
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port ..............................199
Modify the enabling status of management port .....................................................................199
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .....................................................................198
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port ........................................................198
Modify the transmission speed of the management port ..........................................................200
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision .............................................................199
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port .............................................200
Verify the configuration of the management port ...................................................................198
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .............................................163
Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................253
N
Number of E1s permanently allocated, verify/modify ..................................................................127
O
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................127
Verify ..............................................................................................................................125
Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................253
Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................253

P
PB-VLAN
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ..........................................................160
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ............................................................145
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) .......................................160
PM
Activate one or more measures ............................................................................................ 46
Deactivate one or more measures ........................................................................................ 46
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures .......................................... 46
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures .......................... 46
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure ................................. 47
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure ..................... 45
PRBS
Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................248
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................248
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................................249
Modify the pattern type used for the measure .......................................................................248
Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................248
Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................248
PSU
Enable/disable the PSU alarm ..............................................................................................267
Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm ................................................................................267
Q
Queue Depth
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............................188
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ...............................188
R
Radio configuration
Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link .....................................................................................121
Delete a Radio Link ............................................................................................................120
Modify a Radio Link ............................................................................................................120
Verify the Radio Link configuration .......................................................................................119
Radio Link label, verify/modify .................................................................................................131
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................251
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................252
Verify the status ................................................................................................................251

Radio switch
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............272
Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................270
Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................271
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................271
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................271
Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................270
Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................270
Reference band
Modify .............................................................................................................................125
Verify ..............................................................................................................................125
Reference modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................126
Verify ..............................................................................................................................125
Remote equipment list

Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 27
Add equipment .................................................................................................................. 28
Open the WEB page of equipment (Remote Link) .................................................................... 29
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 27
Remove equipment ............................................................................................................. 28
Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 27
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 29
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................240
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................240
Restore Factory Default of the equipment ................................................................................... 68
RMon
Activate the count of the RMon statistics ...............................................................................276
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics ...........................................................................277
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................280
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics ........................................277
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON
statistics ..........................................................................................................................282
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics ..........279
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance per Port & Priority and per Port & VLAN) 298
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) ..........................................295
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ..............................289
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and
Port & VLAN) ....................................................................................................................292
Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ...............298
Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .............................................295
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics .........................279
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ..............................................277
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON
statistics ..........................................................................................................................280
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics ................278
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics ........................................................................276

Routing Table
Add an element to the Routing Table ....................................................................................204
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ...........................................................205
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ............................................................................204
RSTP
Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment ...............................................169
Verify the information stored by every single Switch port ........................................................174
Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function ...........................................170
Verify/modify the cost of the a port ......................................................................................173
Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) .......................................171
Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function ...................................................................171
Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission ......................................172
Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets .........................................172
Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function ............................................................170
Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch ...................................................................172
Verify/modify the priority of a port .......................................................................................173
Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port ....................................................173
Verify/modify the version of the protocol ..............................................................................171
S
S/N measure
Update the value ...............................................................................................................246
Verify the value .................................................................................................................246
Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................................. 60
Save the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................... 59
Security
Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol .........................................................................115
Modify the FTP access credentials ........................................................................................115
Modify the SFTP access credentials ......................................................................................116
Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols .......................................................115
Set of profile used by the adaptive modulation

Modify .............................................................................................................................127
Statistics
Reset the counters results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ......................................................193
Reset the counters results (Interfaces group) .......................................................................192
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ............................192
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) .............................................192
Synchronisation
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source ....................................................................220
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism .....................219
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source ......................................222
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................218

Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................220
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source .....................................................................220
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry
of Wait Time .....................................................................................................................222
Re-time the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation .....................224
Set a synchronism source as preferential ..............................................................................221
Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1 .............................................222
Set the Hold Off Time parameter .........................................................................................218
Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH ................................................221
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm ..............................................................................218
Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B ...................................221
Set the WTR Time parameter ..............................................................................................218
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources ................................................219
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .......................................................217
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN ........................................223
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................................219
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources ....
223
T
TDM matrix
Delete one or more connections ..........................................................................................213
Display the connections of the equipment .............................................................................211
Execute a Radio-Radio connection .......................................................................................212
Execute a Tributary-Radio connection ...................................................................................211
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..............................................................................212
Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) ....................................................................213
Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................131
Transmission frequency, verify/modify ......................................................................................239
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................127
User Input
Modify the name ...............................................................................................................302
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input .......................................................................302
Verify the status and configuration ......................................................................................302
User Output
Force the activation ...........................................................................................................307
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts ..................................................................306
Modify the name ...............................................................................................................306
Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................307
Signal coupled, modify .......................................................................................................307

Verify the status and configuration ......................................................................................306
Users
Add a user ......................................................................................................................... 98
Add a user group ................................................................................................................ 83
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................100
Delete a user group ............................................................................................................ 85
Force the logout of a user ...................................................................................................106
Modify a user ..................................................................................................................... 99
Modify a user group ............................................................................................................ 84
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login ......................................................................104
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ..............................................................................104
Verify the user groups ......................................................................................................... 83
Verify the users connected to the equipment .........................................................................106
Verify the users list ............................................................................................................. 98
V
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................................... 38
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ..............................................163
VLAN
Create one or more static VLANs .........................................................................................155
Delete one or more static VLANs ..........................................................................................156
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table .................................................152
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................153
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ............................154
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ..............................................................................155
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received
on the port .......................................................................................................................154
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ............................................................154
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses managed by the Switch for the VLANs ......................153
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ............................................................153
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management .........................................................152
Verify the existing static VLANs ...........................................................................................154
W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ............................................................................................................................ 62
Deactivate ......................................................................................................................... 63
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................. 62
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 62
WEB LCT page

Close the page ................................................................................................................... 19
Display the page of equipment (Remote Link) ........................................................................ 25

Open more pages ............................................................................................................... 19
Open the page from Browser ............................................................................................... 18
X
Xpic
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU ...........................................................133
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .........................................................134
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ....................................................................134
Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU ..........................................................................133
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function ........................................................133

PARAMETERS LIST
A E
ACM Engine .............................................129 E1
AIS Alarm ...........................................210
ACM Table ...............................................130
Enable ...............................................210
Active Modulation ................................130
Internal Loop ......................................210
Ethernet Capacity ................................130
Line Loop ...........................................210
Global Capacity ...................................130
LOS Alarm ..........................................210
Max. TDM Capacity ..............................130
Los Inversion ......................................210
Agent IP Address .................................. 22, 40 Tributary ............................................210
Alarms ..................................................... 81 Equipment Feature
Group/Alarm ........................................ 80 Built-in fade margin .............................. 41
Severity .............................................. 80 Enhanced Eth monitoring ....................... 41
Trap Notification ................................... 80 Eth OAM enhanced ............................... 41

ETH transport ...................................... 41
ATPC
OSPF .................................................. 41
ATPC Full Range ..................................244 Packet processing (1) ............................ 41
ATPC Regulation ..................................244
Radio Aggregation ................................ 41
ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx ...............244
Security package .................................. 41
Current Power .....................................244 Sync Quality management ..................... 41
Max Ptx ..............................................244
Upgrade up to 100Mbps ........................ 41
Tx Power Control .................................244
B Upgrade up to 50Mbps .......................... 41
Bandwidth ...............................................129 XPIC ................................................... 41
Equipment firmware
Bridge Mode ...................................... 22, 140
Actual Release ..................................... 69
Bench Status ....................................... 69
Downloading Status .............................. 69
C Release Bench 1 ................................... 70

Release Bench 2 ................................... 70
Carrier Only ..................................... 255, 264 Software ............................................. 69
Software Version .................................. 69
Unit .................................................... 69
D Equipment ID ...................................... 22, 40
Dplx Freq ................................................243 Equipment Type ................................... 22, 40
Equipment unit
Expected Type ..................................... 44
HW Ver. .............................................. 44

Par Part Number .................................. 44 Descr .................................................185
Part Number ........................................ 44 Link ID ...............................................185
Real Type ............................................ 44 LLF Status ..........................................185
Serial Number ...................................... 44 LOS to Circuit .....................................185
Unit Alarms ......................................... 44 Port ...................................................185
Protection Mode ..................................185
Ethernet Bridge Mode ................................ 40
Signal Fail ..........................................185
EthType
Local Link ID ............................................130
Description .........................................164
Egress EtherType ................................164 Lower Profile ............................................130
Ingress EtherType ...............................164
Port ...................................................164
M
MAC Address ............................................ 40
F
Manager IP Address 1 ...............................105
Factory default .......................................... 70
Manager IP Address 2 ...............................105

Firmware Version ...................................... 40
Measurements Resolution
Forced Switch ..........................................265
Prx ....................................................243
FTP protocol ............................................. 16 Ptx ....................................................243
MNGT port
Admin State .......................................202
Auto Neg ............................................202
H
Default Gateway ..................................202
Header Compression IP Address ..........................................202
Context Depth ....................................167 Link Status .........................................202
H.C. Status .........................................167 Net Mask ............................................202
Parsing Mode ......................................167 Port Alarm Report ................................202
Port ...................................................167 Speed ................................................202
VLAN ID .............................................202
Help Web Server ....................................... 16
P
I
PB-VLAN
IP Address ................................................ 40
Acceptable Frame Types .......................162
BPDU Priority ......................................151
COS Preservation ................................162
C-VLAN ID ..........................................161
L
Default User Priority .............................162
Link Label ...............................................132 Dot1x ................................................151

GMRP .................................................151
LLF GVRP .................................................151
Alarm to Circuit ...................................185
IGMP .................................................151
Circuit ................................................185 Ingress Filtering ..................................162
Delay Time .........................................185

LACP .................................................151 PRBS
Port .................................... 151, 161, 162 2Mbit/s Selection .................................250
P-VID ................................................162 BER ...................................................250
STP ...................................................151 E1 Signal ............................................250
S-VID ................................................162 Elapsed Time ......................................250
S-VLAN ID ..........................................161 Errors ................................................250
Untagged CEP .....................................161 Fail Alarm ...........................................250
Untagged PEP .....................................161 Fail Alarms .........................................250
Start/Stop ..........................................250
Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................129
Test Pattern ........................................250
Port Manager
Profile Management ..................................129
Data Flow
Description ....................................149
Flow Control Admin Status ...............149
Flow Control Oper Status .................149
Port ..............................................149
Q
Description ................................. 146, 150
Queue Depth
Optical
Action ................................................190
Description ....................................148
Profile ................................................189
Fail Alarm ......................................148
Profile description ................................189
Link Length 50um (m) .....................149
Link Length 62.5um (m) ..................149
Link Length 9um (m) ......................149
Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps) ..................149
Port ..............................................148
R
Vendor Date ..................................148
Radio Configurator
Vendor Name .................................148
Link Name ..........................................122
Vendor PN .....................................148
Link Type ...........................................122
Vendor SN .....................................148
Wave Length (nm) ..........................148 Link# .................................................122
ODU Configuration ...............................122
Physical
Admin State ...................................147
Radio Loop ..............................................264
Auto Neg .......................................147
Bridge Port Type .............................147 Radio switch
Duplex ..........................................147 Rx Forced Switch .................................273
Link Status ....................................147 Tx Forced Switch .................................273
MDI/MDIX .....................................147 Tx Preferential ....................................273
Media ............................................146
Wait Time (m) ....................................273
MTU ..............................................147
Port ..............................................146 Reference Modulation ................................129
Speed ...........................................147
Remote Element Table ............................... 30
Port ...................................................150
Priority 0 ............................................150
Remote equipment list ............................... 30
Priority 1 ............................................150
Priority 2 ............................................150 RMon
Priority 3 ............................................150 Statistics
Priority 4 ............................................150 RMON Status .................................283
Priority 5 ............................................150
Routing Table
Priority 6 ............................................150
Destination .........................................206
Priority 7 ............................................150
Distance .............................................206

Gateway ............................................206 Port ...................................................194
Interface ............................................206
Status Control ..........................................264
Protocol .............................................206
Subnet Mask .......................................206 Status signal ............................................. 81
RSTP Synchronisation
Dynamic Path Cost Calculation ..............175 1000Base-T Role
Dynamic Path Cost Lag-Speed ...............176 Description ....................................230
Enable Ports .......................................175 Media ............................................230
Forward Delay ....................................176 Port ..............................................230
Hello Time ..........................................176 Role ..............................................230
Max Age .............................................176 Alarms ...............................................225
Port Settings E1 Retiming

Path Cost ......................................177 E1 Retiming ...................................231
Port Priority ...................................177 Name ............................................231
Port Role ............................... 177, 178 Sync Alarm ....................................231
RSTP Status ...................................177 Forced Switch .....................................227
Port Status General
Designated Bridge ..........................179 Current .........................................226
Designated Cost .............................179 Status ...........................................226
Designated Port ..............................179 Hold Off Time ......................................225
Designated Root .............................179 Internal ..............................................226
Port State ......................................179 LAN SSM
Type .............................................179 Description ....................................228
Priority ...............................................176 Media ............................................229
Status ................................................175 Port ..............................................228
System Control ...................................175 Rx Dropped Packets ........................229
Tx Hold Count .....................................176 Rx Errored Packets .........................229
Version ..............................................176 Rx Pkts .........................................229

Rx Quality .....................................229
RT PSU ........................................... 255, 264 SSM Enable ...................................229
Tx Pkts ..........................................229
Rx Forced ................................................264
Tx Quality ......................................229
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................132 LTI Reset Time ....................................225

LTI Set Time .......................................225
Name .................................................226
ODU/LAN A .........................................226
S ODU/LAN B .........................................226
ODU/LAN C .........................................226
S/N ........................................................247 ODU/LAN D ........................................226
Preferential Switch ...............................227
Service Name .................................. 113, 117
Priority ...............................................227
Service Status .........................................117 SA Bit
T2 E1 ............................................231
Services Status Config
T3 SYNC ........................................231
Admin Status ......................................110
Status Control .....................................225
Operative Status .................................110
Sync Loss ...........................................227
Service Name .....................................110
T0
Statistics Ovw Rx Qlty ...................................227

Ovw Tx Qlty ...................................228
Descr .................................................194
Rx Quality .....................................227

Source ..........................................227 SNMP ............................................. 86
Tx Quality ......................................227 SSH ............................................... 86
T2 E1 .................................................226 Priv ...................................................101
T3 SYNC ............................................226 Timeout .............................................101
TE SyncE A .........................................226 User ..................................................101
TE SyncE B .........................................226
WTR Time ..........................................225
System Date/Time ..................................... 40

V
System Up Time ........................................ 40
VLAN
Acceptable Frame Types .......................158
Default User Priority .............................159
Description .......................... 158, 177, 178
T
Ether Type ..........................................159
Tx Forced ................................................264 Global MAC Learning Status ..................157

Ingress Filtering ..................................158
Tx Freq ...................................................243
Learning Mode ....................................157
MAC Add. Table Aging Time ..................157
Tx Transmitter ................................. 255, 264
Max Supported VLAN ...........................157
Max. VLAN ID .....................................157
Member Ports .....................................159
U Num of VLANs in the System .................158

Port .................................... 158, 177, 178
Upper Profile ...........................................130 PVID ..................................................159
Unicast MAC Learning Limit ...................157
User Input
Untagged Ports ...................................159
Input Operation ..................................304
VLAN ID .............................................159
Label .................................................304
Severity .............................................304
Side ..................................................304
Status ................................................304
W
User Output
Wake Up
Active State ........................................308
NE Location ......................................... 64
Alarms Binding ....................................308
NMS IP Address .................................... 64
Force .................................................308
Status ................................................. 64
Label .................................................308
Timeout (Minutes) ................................ 64
Status ................................................308
WEB LCT
Users
Product Code ....................................... 40
Auth ..................................................101
Release ............................................... 11
Group ................................................101
Version ............................................... 40
Groups
CLI ................................................ 86 WEB LCT Console ...................................... 16
FTP ................................................ 86
HTTP ............................................. 86
HTTPS ............................................ 86
Name ............................................. 86
X
Profile ..................................... 86, 101
SFTP .............................................. 86 Xpic ........................................................264

Fault Management Procedure ................135
ODU A ...............................................135
ODU A FMP Tx Off Under Remote End Request
135
ODU A FMP Xpic Disable .......................135
ODU B ...............................................135
ODU B FMP
Xpic Disable ...................................135

ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.


Manual Web LCT Mn00327e 002 Ags 20 1 1 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Manual Web LCT Mn00327e 002 Ags 20 1 1 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

WEB LCT

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 11

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 12

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 17

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 20

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 34

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 1

2 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 3

BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................137

4 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 5

6 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 7

8 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 9

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 310

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 315

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 325

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 331

10 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 11

12 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 13

Remote equipment list

WEB LCT Session

* CLI user. User of SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System) application.

14 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 15

16 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Open/close the WEB LCT page

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 17

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser

The opening of the WEB LCT page is supported with:

As help for the WEB LCT application in order to manage:

2. In the address box type the IP Address of the equipment.

4. Type the password, in the Password box.

18 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Close the WEB LCT page

Select the [Logout] parameter.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 19

1 - Equipment Menu area

Fig.2 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an AGS-20 equipment.

Fig.2 Elements of the WEB LCT page (AGS-20)

20 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 21

This area shows the equipment general properties.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.

The parameters are subdivided by radio branch:

22 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Press to force the Equipment Info area updating.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002 23

User Profile parameter

User Profile parameter

Read/Write. The user has Read/Write profile.

Maint. The user has Maintenance profile.

Read Only. The user has Read Only profile.

This parameter executes the logout of the current user.

24 WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002